B-85314EN-1_01 Fanuc Robodrill Custom PMC Functions

8/18/2019 B-85314EN-1_01 Fanuc Robodrill Custom PMC Functions

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/b-85314en-101-fanuc-robodrill-custom-pmc-functions 1/242

B-85314EN-1/01

FANUC ROBODRILL @-D14M+A5FANUC ROBODRILL @-D14L+A5

FANUC ROBODRILL @-D14S+A5FANUC ROBODRILL @-D21M+A5FANUC ROBODRILL @-D21L+A5FANUC ROBODRILL @-D21S+A5

CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

WARNING

To use the products explained herein safely, read carefully and understandcompletely all the descriptions about safety at the beginning of this manualand those about the functions you are going to use. Failing to follow anysafety precaution or any direction described herein may lead to death or injury. Always keep this manual near your product, so you can referenceit whenever necessary.



WARNING

Before starting to install, operate, or maintain the product, carefully read andunderstand the "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS." Failing to follow any of these safetyprecautions and other cautions stated herein may lead to death or injury.

The model covered by this manual, and its abbreviation is:

Product name Abbreviation

FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14 (M,L,S) i A5

FANUC ROBODRILL α-D21 (M,L, S) i A5

Controller: A04B-0102- B201, B301, B302FANUC Series 31i-B5

Mechanical Unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113

A04B-0102- B101,B102, B103, B104, B105, B106,

B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116

α-D14 i A5

α-D21 i A5

To help prevent accidents that may occur due to incorrect handling, this operator's manual indicates

cautions with marks. The meaning of each mark is explained below. Before starting to read the text of

the cautions, be sure to understand the meaning of the corresponding marks.

DANGER:Indicates that incorrect handling will invite an imminent danger of death or

serious injury.

WARNING

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to death or serious injury.

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to light or moderate injury.

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may lead to damage not only to the product

of interest but also to other properties.

ATTENTION

Describes precautions for protecting the product of interest from damage.

SUPPLEMENT: Describes information for effective and efficient use of the product of interest.

• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and ForeignTrade Law”. The export of α-D14Mi A5/D14Li A5/D14Si A5, α-D21Mi A5/D21Li A5/D21Si A5

from Japan is subject to an export license by the government of Japan. Other models in thismanual may also be subject to export controls. Further, re-export to another country may besubject to the license of the government of the country from where the product is re-exported.Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United Statesgovernment. Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUCfor advice.

In this manual, we have tried to describe as many matters as possible.However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done or which cannot be

done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especiallydescribed as possible in this manual should be regarded as "impossible." If you wanderwhether a specific matter is possible, ask FANUC.



B-85314EN-1/01 PREFACE

p-1

PREFACE

1 PURPOSES OF THE MACHINE

The FANUC ROBODRILL α-DiA5 series is a machine tool that operates under control of a CNC

(computer numerical control unit). It can be used for drilling, tapping, light milling, milling, and boring.

It should not be used for any other purposes.

2 DEFINITION OF USERS

2.1 Operators

In this manual, the term operator refers to a person who operates the machine.

The operator must read this manual and become familiar with its contents. If the operator operates themachine without becoming familiar with its contents, the operator and the people around the machine

may be in serious danger.

The operator is not allowed to carry out maintenance work that involves:

(1) Removal of a cover that requires a tool for its removal (fixed cover)

(2) Installation and movement of the machine

2.2 Daily Maintenance and Preventive Maintenance Personnel

These personnel must have completed ROBODRILL course at the Robomachine Department at the

FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge and must also be qualified by the company or

organization to which they belong.

Daily maintenance and preventive maintenance personnel must observe the "Cautions on Maintenance,"

described below.

Cautions that Person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance must

observe during maintenance



PREFACE B-85314EN-1/01

WARNING1 Before removing a cover for maintenance purposes, be sure to set the control

unit cabinet door circuit breaker for the machine to its off position. Otherwise, an

unexpected behavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock.2 Before switching on the power with a cover removed for maintenance purposes,

make sure that no one is beside the machine. Otherwise, an unexpectedbehavior of the machine may lead to injury or an electric shock.

3 Before starting maintenance work, post a notice near the control unit cabinetdoor circuit breaker to indicate that no one except the worker of interest isallowed to switch on the power.

4 Before switching on the power and operating the machine during or aftermaintenance work, make sure that no tool or the like is left in the machine.Otherwise, when the machine runs, it may strike the tool or the like towardpeople around the machine.

5 When making electrical adjustments with a cover removed, use a tool with asufficient electrical protection (for example, a screwdriver made of plastic).Otherwise, there is a risk of an electrical shock.

6 After maintenance work, make sure that all components, including screws, thatwere removed for maintenance purposes are back in place. Otherwise, safetydevices may fail to function, or injury may occur, because of a malfunction orelectric shock.

7 When replacing maintenance parts, be sure to keep the control unit cabinet doorcircuit breaker set to its off position. Otherwise, there may occur damage to themaintenance parts or an electrical shock.

8 The person in charge of routine maintenance and preventive maintenance shallnot be engaged in replacement of the CNC memory backup battery orfluorescent lamps within the machine. Only the maintenance engineer isallowed to replace such electrical components. Work by any person with nosufficient knowledge may disable safety devices from working, resulting in anunexpected behavior of the machine that may cause injury or an electric shock.

9 Be sure to close and lock the control unit cabinet door upon completion ofmaintenance work to prevent fluid such as coolant or chippings from entering theunit. Similarly, be sure to close the covers of the operator's panel and cable ductand securely tighten the mounting screws of the covers.

2.3 Maintenance Personnel

These personnel must have sufficient knowledge of machinery or electricity to perform maintenance

properly, must have completed a maintenance course at the FA or Robomachine Department of the

FANUC School or must have equivalent knowledge, and must also be qualified by the company or

organization to which they belong.

Maintenance personnel perform work including:

(1) Installation and movement of the machine

(2) Repair of the machine (replacement of mechanical units and replacement of electric components that

require setup and adjustment after being replaced)

Maintenance personnel must observe the "Caution on Maintenance," described above. Experienced

maintenance personnel, in particular, should avoid accidents due to carelessness or overconfidence.

p-2



B-85314EN-1/01 PREFACE

p-3

3 ORGANIZATION OF THIS MANUAL

This manual covers the following models:

Model name Abbreviation



Control unit: A04B-0102-B201, B301, B302

FANUC Series 31i-B5

Mechanical unit: A04B-0099-B101, B103, B111, B113

A04B-0102-B101, B102, B103, B104, B105, B106,

B111, B112, B113, B114, B115, B116

α-D14 i A5

α-D21 i A5

The manuals for this machine include the following:

(1) FANUC ROBODRILLα

-D14iA5/D21

iA5 Series OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN):Describes how to use and maintain this machine.

(2) FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14iA5/D21iA5 Series CUSTOM PMC FUNCTION OPERATOR'S

MANUAL (B-85314EN-1): This manual. Describes how to operate the custom PMC function, as

well as programming.

(3) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64484EN): Describes how to operate

numerical control (NC) units and how to create programs.

(4) FANUC ROBODRILL α-D14iA5/D21iA5 Series MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN):

Describes alarms, how to perform troubleshooting, and how to replace parts.

(5) FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64485EN): Describes how to

perform troubleshooting and adjustment on numerical control (NC) units.

Before using this machine, read the necessary parts of manual (1).For daily handling and for reference, use manuals (1) and (3).

Use manuals (4) and (5) for troubleshooting, replacement of parts, and adjustment of machine sections.

Descriptions in manuals (1), (2), and (4) have priority over those in manuals (3) and (5). In you find any

contradiction, assume that the description in manuals (1), (2), and (4) applies.

This manual contains minimum requirements for using the custom PMC function.If you require more detailed explanation, see the following manual:

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B, Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 32i-MODEL B, Series

35i-MODEL B

PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64513EN)





B-85314EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE....................................................................................................p-1

1 OUTLINE .................................................................................................1

2 EXPLANATION OF TERMS....................................................................3

3 NOTES ....................................................................................................4

4 SPECIFICATIONS...................................................................................5

5 INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................65.1 STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS......................................... 6

5.2 OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................105.2.1 I/O Unit Model-A...................................................................................................10

5.2.2 I/O Link Connection Unit.......................................................................................22

5.2.3 Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel ........................................................225.2.3.1 Terminal Module B................................................ ............................................ 29

5.2.4 Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)..........................................37

5.2.5 Optional I/O Module Connection...........................................................................46

5.2.6 Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used.....................................46

6 ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC....................................47

7 INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS .........................................48

8 EDITING ................................................................................................508.1 STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ............................................................50

8.2 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS................................................................. 518.2.1 Switching to the Edit Screen ..................................................................................51

8.2.2 Editing Ladder Programs........................................................................................53

8.3 EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES ...................................... 65

8.4 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS .....................................................68

8.5 ENDING AN EDITING SESSION ................................................................70

9 CONFIRMATION...................................................................................71

9.1 DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS..................................... 719.2 SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS................................................................................... 73

10 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS ............................................................74

11 INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA ..........................................................7811.1 OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN...................................... 78

11.2 OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN...................................................... 81

12 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER

PROGRAMS..........................................................................................84

12.1 BASIC SIGNALS .......................................................................................10512.2 MACHINE STATUS...................................................................................105

12.3 FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL.................................................. 106



TABLE OF CONTENTS B-85314EN-1/01

c-2

12.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION ..................... 108

12.5 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION......................... 110

12.6 EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..................................... 113

12.7 M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89)......................................... 116

12.8 INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION (OPTION)................. 117

12.9 RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION ........................................................... 117

12.10 ALARM OUTPUT 2.................................................................................... 117

12.11 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT...................................................................... 118

12.12 ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL ....................................................120

12.13 OPERATOR'S PANEL............................................................................... 121

12.14 OPERATION MODE SWITCHING ............................................................122

12.15 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT................................................................ 123

12.16 MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ...................................................................124

12.17 COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT, CENTER

THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW ..................................................125

12.18 COMPLETION OF MACHINING................................................................ 125

12.19 FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL .............................................................126

12.20 AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL...................................................... 126

12.21 AI TOOL MONITOR................................................................................... 127

12.22 SPINDLE ...................................................................................................127

12.23 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 128

12.24 POSITION SWITCH .................................................................................. 128

12.25 CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS......................................... 129

12.26 CUSTOM MACROS ..................................................................................130

12.27 M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ................................................................131

12.28 OPERATION CONTROL...........................................................................131

12.29 ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY...................................... 132

12.30 MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP ..................................................................... 132

12.31 POWER-OFF.............................................................................................132

12.32 OVERRIDE CONTROL .............................................................................133

12.33 ROBOT INTERFACE................................................................................. 134

12.34 Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item ..................................... 136

12.35 BLOCK SKIP ............................................................................................. 136

13 USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS.............................137

14 SETTING PARAMETERS ...................................................................143

15 ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST ...........................................14415.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm Screen.................. 144

15.2 PMC System Alarm Messages ..................................................................152

15.3 Operation Errors ........................................................................................157

15.4 I/O Communication Error Messages.......................................................... 172

PPENDIX

A CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC LADDER-III .........................181 A.1 CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE ........................................................ 182



B-85314EN-1/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS

c-3

A.2 LADDER PROGRAM EDITING................................................................. 185A.2.1 Title Editing..........................................................................................................185

A.2.2 Ladder Editing......................................................................................................186

A.2.3 Symbol and Comment Editing .............................................................................187

A.2.4 Message Editing ...................................................................................................188A.2.5 I/O Module Editing ..............................................................................................189

A.2.6 System Parameter Editing ....................................................................................189

A.3 LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILE CREATION .190

A.4 CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION............................................. 193

A.5 EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES .................................... 205A.5.1 Ladder Program Message Editing ........................................................................205

B FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION...............................................209B.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................209

B.2 SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT...... 213

B.3 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 214B.4 OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN AND MODIFYING

THE VALUES OF SIGNALS...................................................................... 215

C CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE

.............................................................................................................218C.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................218

C.2 SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................218

D MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION........................................220D.1 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY.......... 221

D.2 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OF THE LADDER

PROGRAM ................................................................................................223

D.3 CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA.............................................................. 225D.3.1 Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display.......................................225

D.3.2 Converting the Ladder Program...........................................................................226

D.4 INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTO THE CNC... 227

D.5 CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO A MNEMONIC

FORMAT FILE........................................................................................... 227





B-85314EN-1/01 1.OUTLINE

1 OUTLINE

The custom PMC function allows customers to create sequence programs on their own. The features ofthe function include:

(1) Does not require hardware. (Low cost and increased maintainability)

• The sequence program controller is built into the machine and, therefore, does not require any

installation space, unlike in conventional systems.

• Interfacing with ROBODRILL is at the software level and, therefore, does not require any

signal lines, unlike in conventional systems. You can easily perform more advanced control by

using a variety of interface signals.

• You can control external devices by using the terminal block for the ROBODRILL installed as

standard. (16 inputs and 16 outputs)

You can add more additional I/O signals, if required. (Optional)

(2) Variety of software functions• You can display your own alarm and operator messages on the ROBODRILL screen.

• LEDs and other indicators for alarms are not required.

• Full debugging functions are provided, such as the display of the operating status of created

ladder programs, signal diagnosis, and trace (which displays changes in signal states with the

passage of time).

• Parameters such as variable timers and keep relays can be set on the screen.

ROBODRILL

External device

Sequencer

ROBODRILL

Custom PMC

System ladder

program

External device

Conventional system using a commercially

available sequencer System using the custom PMC function

- 1 -



1.OUTLINE B-85314EN-1/01

- 2 -

(3) Independent system ladder program (ROBODRILL controller: first PMC) and custom PMC (jig

controller: second PMC)

• You can edit or input and output only custom PMC portions.

• You can set any symbols and comments for all addresses. (The symbols and comments that

have been set are displayed when the second PMC is selected. However, they are not displayedon the parameter and other screens that are common to the first and second PMCs.)

• You can enable the display of alarms and messages simply by making message settings only

for the main body of a ladder program. (You can enable the display of the alarms and

messages without having to set message data (separate from the main body of the ladder

program) for the multi-language display function.)

ROBODRILL

Custom PMC

System ladderprogram

Can be input andoutput individually

Independent data

Without multi-languagedisplay function

Custom PMC

Message

Ladder programsection

+

Custom PMC

Message

Ladder programsection

Message data formulti-language display

function

With multi-language displayfunction

+



B-85314EN-1/01 2.EXPLANATION OF TERMS

- 3 -

2 EXPLANATION OF TERMS

Custom ladder program: Sequence program created by a customer to control jigs and so forth (secondPMC)

System ladder program: Sequence program prepared beforehand to exercise basic control on the

ROBODRILL (first PMC)

PMC: Hardware system software for performing control, editing, and other

operations on custom and system ladder programs

Soft key: Twelve buttons displayed at the bottom of the LCD panel

QUICK screen: Application screen dedicated to ROBODRILL



3.NOTES B-85314EN-1/01

- 4 -

3 NOTES

(1) Make sure that edited custom PMC (second PMC) ladder programs are attached to the machine. Inaddition, supply those ladder programs to your FANUC sales or service person.

(2) Do not reference, or write to, addresses other than those specified.

(3) Do not edit the system ladder program (first PMC).

(4) When the I/O module allocation needs to be modified, be familiar with the specifications before

making any addition or change.

(5) Before installing edited custom PMC data in the machine, check the series and edition of the system

ladder program. If the interface signals for use with a newly added system ladder program are used,

the machine may not operate normally when the series and edition of the system ladder program

currently used is older.

(6) Do not use the following functional instructions:

END1 (SUB1), END2 (SUB2), END (SUB64), WINDR (SUB51), SPCNT (SUB46), WINDW

(SUB52), MMCWR (SUB98), MMCWW (SUB99), AXCTL (SUB53)(7) Before pulling out and inserting a memory card, turn the power OFF.

(8) To use the custom PMC function, set the following PMC parameter bit. (See Chapter 10,

"SETTING PMC PARAMETERS.")

Parameter Value Function

1 Makes the custom PMC function available.K15#7

0 Makes the custom PMC function unavailable.

where K: Keep relay, #7: Seventh bit

(9) The custom PMC function of the D14/21iA5 does not require the ladder edit card. Editing is always

permitted as long as the machine is in the emergency stop state. To disable custom PMC editing,

use the following PMC parameter bit.

Parameter Value Function

1 Disables custom PMC editing.K14#0

0 Enables custom PMC editing.

(10) The M code used with a custom PMC function must always be the first M code.

(11) As ladder editing software for the personal computer, use FANUC LADDER-III Version 6.30 or

later.

(12) The maximum allowable custom PMC program size (flash ROM size) is 128 KB. Not only ladder

programs but also comments and messages consume the memory. Ensure that the maximum

allowable program size is not exceeded.



B-85314EN-1/01 4.SPECIFICATIONS

- 5 -

4 SPECIFICATIONS

Programming language Ladder programType of program Second PMC

Number of instructions 14 basic instructions, 84 functional instructions

Basic instruction processing time 9.1 nsec /step

Program size Approx. 16000 steps

Maximum allowable program size (Flash ROM size) 128 KB

Number of usable subprograms 3500

Inputs 16 as standard

(The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 48 by

adding terminal blocks.)

Up to 1024 inputs can be added as options.)

No. of inputs/ outputs

Outputs 16 as standard

(The number of inputs can be expanded to up to 32 byadding terminal blocks.)

Up to 1024 outputs can be added as options.)

Internal relay Non-hold type 1000 bytes (8000 points)

Message relay 50 bytes (400 points)

Special auxiliary relay 100 points

Variable 80 pointsTimer

Fixed 140 points

Counter 30 points

Keep relay 10 bytes (80 points)

Data table 1000 bytes/8000 items (if used with an internal relay of the

hold type)



5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS B-85314EN-1/01

5 INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

5.1 STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

You can use 16 inputs and 16 outputs of standard terminal block XT1.

You can add terminal blocks XTC1 (16 inputs and 16 outputs) and XTC2 (16 inputs) to expand the

number of inputs to up to 48 and that of outputs to up to 32.

To use these inputs and outputs, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.

EXT. INTERFACE, and set "1:FOR CUSTOM PMC" in the input/output signal setting field.

Refer to the "ROBODRILL α-D14/21iA5 OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-85314EN)" for details.

Refer to the "ROBODRILL α- D14/21iA5 SERIES MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-85315EN)" for the

specifications of the terminal blocks and connection cables.

Wiring PCB unit: A04B-0102-C210#STA

Terminal block [XT1] 16 inputs (X4.0 to X5.7)

16 outputs (Y4.0 to Y5.7)

[DI01]

[DI02]

16 inputs (X0.0 to X1.7)

16 outputs (Y0.0 to Y1.7)

16 inputs (X2.0 to X3.7)Terminal block [XTC2]

Terminal block [XTC1]

- 6 -



B-85314EN-1/01 5.INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

- 7 -

Connection diagram from connector panel PC board to 50-pin terminal block (XT1)

Terminal size: M3.5, Maximum terminal width: 6.8mm

Name Address Signal Destinat ion 01 X 4.0 02 X 4.1

UDI01 X 4.0 User DI01 XT1-01 03 +24E 04 +24E

UDI02 X 4.1 User DI02 XT1-02 05 X 4.2 06 X 4.3UDI03 X 4.2 User DI03 XT1-05 07 X 4.4 08 X 4.5

UDI04 X 4.3 User DI04 XT1-06 09 +24E 10 +24E

UDI05 X 4.4 User DI05 XT1-07 11 X 4.6 12 X 4.7

UDI06 X 4.5 User DI06 XT1-08 13 X 5.0 14 X 5.1

UDI07 X 4.6 User DI07 XT1-11 15 +24E 16 +24E

UDI08 X 4.7 User DI08 XT1-12 17 X 5.2 18 X 5.3

19 X 5.4 20 X 5.5

UDI09 X 5.0 User DI09 XT1-13 21 +24E 22 +24E

UDI10 X 5.1 User DI10 XT1-14 23 X 5.6 24 X 5.7

UDI11 X 5.2 User DI11 XT1-17 25 Y 2.0 26 Y 2.1

UDI12 X 5.3 User DI12 XT1-18 27 0V 28 0V

UDI13 X 5.4 User DI13 XT1-19 29 Y 2.2 30 Y 2.3UDI14 X 5.5 User DI14 XT1-20 31 Y 2.4 32 Y 2.5

UDI15 X 5.6 User DI15 XT1-23 33 0V 34 0V

UDI16 X 5.7 User DI16 XT1-24 35 Y 2.6 36 Y 2.7

37 Y 3.0 38 Y 3.1

UDO01 Y 2.0 User DO01 XT1-25 39 0V 40 0V

UDO02 Y 2.1 User DO02 XT1-26 41 Y 3.2 42 Y 3.3

UDO03 Y 2.2 User DO03 XT1-29 43 Y 3.4 44 Y 3.5

UDO04 Y 2.3 User DO04 XT1-30 45 0V 46 0V

UDO05 Y 2.4 User DO05 XT1-31 47 Y 3.6 48 Y 3.7

UDO06 Y 2.5 User DO06 XT1-32 49 0V 50 +24E

UDO07 Y 2.6 User DO07 XT1-35













- 8 -

Connection diagram from DI01 to 50-pin terminal block (XTC1)


Name Address Signal Destination 01 X0.0 02 X0.1

UDI17 X0.0 User DI17 XTC1-01 03 +24E 04 +24E

UDI18 X0.1 User DI18 XTC1-02 05 X0.2 06 X0.3UDI19 X0.2 UserDI19 XTC1-05 07 X0.4 08 X0.5


UDI21 X0.4 User DI21 XTC1-07 11 X0.6 12 X0.7




19 X1.4 20 X1.5



UDI27 X1.2 User DI27 XTC1-17 25 Y0.0 26 Y0.1

UDI28 X1.3 User DI28 XTC1-18 27 0V 28 0V

UDI29 X1.4 User DI29 XTC1-19 29 Y0.2 30 Y0.3UDI30 X1.5 User DI30 XTC1-20 31 Y0.4 32 Y0.5


UDI32 X1.7 User DI32 XTC1-24 35 Y0.6 36 Y0.7

37 Y1.0 38 Y1.1

UDO17 Y0.0 User DO17 XTC1-25 39 0V 40 0V

UDO18 Y0.1 User DO18 XTC1-26 41 Y1.2 42 Y1.3


UDO20 Y0.3 User DO20 XTC1-30 45 0V 46 0V


UDO22 Y0.5 User DO22 XTC1-32 49 0V 50 +24E

UDO23 Y0.6 User DO23 XTC1-35













- 9 -

Connection diagram from DI02 to 34-pin terminal block (XTC2)


Name Address Signal Destination 01 X2.0 02 X2.1


UDI34 X2.1 User DI34 XTC2-02 05 X2.2 06 X2.3UDI35 X2.2 User DI35 XTC2-05 07 X2.4 08 X2.5






19 X3.4 20 X3.5





UDI45 X3.4 User DI45 XTC2-19 29 +24E 30 0VUDI46 X3.5 UserDI46 XTC2-20 31 0V 32 0V


UDI48 X3.7 User DI48 XTC2-24




5.2 OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS

5.2.1 I/O Unit Model-A

By installing an I/O Unit Model-A, you can add up to 96 inputs and 64 outputs in the case of standard

setting.

The expansion section is in module units, so that you can select the modules that meet your specifications.

You can add up to five modules (two output modules and three input modules).

Slot 1 Slot 2

Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5

○ ○

○ ○

Interface module

Vertical type

Slots 4 and 5: for use only with output modules

Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only with input modules

- 10 -




1 2 3 4 5

Interface module

Slots 4 and 5: for use onlywith output modules

Slots 1, 2, and 3: for use only withinput modules

Horizontal type

(Specifications of i nput/output modules)

Classificati

on

Name No. of

signals

Type Voltage used Common Shape of connection

AID16C 16 Insulated, DC input 24 V d.c. 0 V Terminal block (M3.5)

AID16D 16 Insulated, DC input 24 V d.c. 24 V Terminal block (M3.5)

AID32E1 32 Insulated, DC input 24 V d.c. 0/24 V MR connector made by

HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD.

Input module

AID32E2 32 Insulated, DC input 24 V d.c. 0/24 V Flat cable connector

AOD08C 8 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 0 V Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD08D 8 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 24 V Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD16C 16 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 0 V Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD16D 16 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 24 V Terminal block (M3.5)

AOD32C1 32 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 0 V MR connector made by

HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD.

AOD32C2 32 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 0 V Flat cable connector

AOD32D1 32 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 24 V MR connector made by

HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD. AOD32D2 32 Insulated, DC output 12-24 V d.c. 24 V Flat cable connector

AOR08G 8 Relay output 250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c. - Terminal block (M3.5)

Output

module

AOR16G 16 Relay output 250 V a.c. / 30 V d.c. - Terminal block (M3.5)

In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used:

Signal classification Expansion section slot

(see the above figu re and the

figure on the previous page)

No. of signals Signal address

Slot 1 16, 32 X200.0 to X203.7

Slot 2 16, 32 X204.0 to X207.7

Input signal

(up to 96 inputs)

Slot 3 16, 32 X208.0 to X211.7

Slot 4 8, 16, 32 Y200.0 to Y203.7Output signal

(up to 64 outputs) Slot 5 8, 16, 32 Y204.0 to Y207.7

- 11 -




A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

[AID16C] [AID16D]

[Address allocation]

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3

A0 X 200.0 X 204.0 X 208.0

A1 X 200.1 X 204.1 X 208.1

A2 X 200.2 X 204.2 X 208.2

A3 X 200.3 X 204.3 X 208.3

A4 X 200.4 X 204.4 X 208.4

A5 X 200.5 X 204.5 X 208.5

A6 X 200.6 X 204.6 X 208.6

A7 X 200.7 X 204.7 X 208.7

B0 X 201.0 X 205.0 X 209.0

B1 X 201.1 X 205.1 X 209.1

B2 X 201.2 X 205.2 X 209.2

B3 X 201.3 X 205.3 X 209.3

B4 X 201.4 X 205.4 X 209.4

B5 X 201.5 X 205.5 X 209.5

B6 X 201.6 X 205.6 X 209.6

B7 X 201.7 X 205.7 X 209.7

- 12 -




36

21

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

03

20

35

02

19

34

01

33

45

29

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

12

28

44

11

27

43

10

42

41

40

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

07

24

39

06

23

38

22

37

50

49

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

16

32

48

15

31

47

30

46

50

49

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

16

32

48

15

31

47

30

46

[AID32E1]


Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3

A0 X 200.0 X 204.0 X 208.0 C0 X 202.0 X 206.0 X 210.0

A1 X 200.1 X 204.1 X 208.1 C1 X 202.1 X 206.1 X 210.1

A2 X 200.2 X 204.2 X 208.2 C2 X 202.2 X 206.2 X 210.2

A3 X 200.3 X 204.3 X 208.3 C3 X 202.3 X 206.3 X 210.3

A4 X 200.4 X 204.4 X 208.4 C4 X 202.4 X 206.4 X 210.4

A5 X 200.5 X 204.5 X 208.5 C5 X 202.5 X 206.5 X 210.5

A6 X 200.6 X 204.6 X 208.6 C6 X 202.6 X 206.6 X 210.6

A7 X 200.7 X 204.7 X 208.7 C7 X 202.7 X 206.7 X 210.7

B0 X 201.0 X 205.0 X 209.0 D0 X 203.0 X 207.0 X 211.0

B1 X 201.1 X 205.1 X 209.1 D1 X 203.1 X 207.1 X 211.1

B2 X 201.2 X 205.2 X 209.2 D2 X 203.2 X 207.2 X 211.2

B3 X 201.3 X 205.3 X 209.3 D3 X 203.3 X 207.3 X 211.3

B4 X 201.4 X 205.4 X 209.4 D4 X 203.4 X 207.4 X 211.4

B5 X 201.5 X 205.5 X 209.5 D5 X 203.5 X 207.5 X 211.5

B6 X 201.6 X 205.6 X 209.6 D6 X 203.6 X 207.6 X 211.6

B7 X 201.7 X 205.7 X 209.7 D7 X 203.7 X 207.7 X 211.7

- 13 -




B06

A06

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

B05

A05

B04

A04

B03

A03

B02

A02

B18

A18

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

B17

A17

B16

A16

B15

A15

B14

A14

B12

A12

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

B11

A11

B10

A10

B09

A09

B08

A08

B24

A24

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

B23

A23

B22

A22

B21

A21

B20

A20

A24

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

[AID32E2]


Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3

A0 X 200.0 X 204.0 X 208.0 C0 X 202.0 X 206.0 X 210.0

A1 X 200.1 X 204.1 X 208.1 C1 X 202.1 X 206.1 X 210.1

A2 X 200.2 X 204.2 X 208.2 C2 X 202.2 X 206.2 X 210.2

A3 X 200.3 X 204.3 X 208.3 C3 X 202.3 X 206.3 X 210.3

A4 X 200.4 X 204.4 X 208.4 C4 X 202.4 X 206.4 X 210.4

A5 X 200.5 X 204.5 X 208.5 C5 X 202.5 X 206.5 X 210.5

A6 X 200.6 X 204.6 X 208.6 C6 X 202.6 X 206.6 X 210.6

A7 X 200.7 X 204.7 X 208.7 C7 X 202.7 X 206.7 X 210.7

B0 X 201.0 X 205.0 X 209.0 D0 X 203.0 X 207.0 X 211.0

B1 X 201.1 X 205.1 X 209.1 D1 X 203.1 X 207.1 X 211.1

B2 X 201.2 X 205.2 X 209.2 D2 X 203.2 X 207.2 X 211.2

B3 X 201.3 X 205.3 X 209.3 D3 X 203.3 X 207.3 X 211.3

B4 X 201.4 X 205.4 X 209.4 D4 X 203.4 X 207.4 X 211.4

B5 X 201.5 X 205.5 X 209.5 D5 X 203.5 X 207.5 X 211.5

B6 X 201.6 X 205.6 X 209.6 D6 X 203.6 X 207.6 X 211.6

B7 X 201.7 X 205.7 X 209.7 D7 X 203.7 X 207.7 X 211.7

- 14 -




A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD A7

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD A7

[AOD08C] [AOD08D]


Slot 4 Slot 5

A0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

A1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

A2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

A3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

A4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

A5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

A6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6 A7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 15 -




A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

B6

B7

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

B6

B7

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

[AOD16C] [AOD16D]


Slot 4 Slot 5

A0 Y 202.0 Y 206.0

A1 Y 202.1 Y 206.1

A2 Y 202.2 Y 206.2

A3 Y 202.3 Y 206.3

A4 Y 202.4 Y 206.4

A5 Y 202.5 Y 206.5

A6 Y 202.6 Y 206.6

A7 Y 202.7 Y 206.7

B0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

B1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

B2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

B3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

B4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

B5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

B6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6

B7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 16 -




50

49

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

16

32

48

15

31

47

30

46

A0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

08

07

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

24

39

06

23

38

22

37

40

C0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

41

13

12

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

28

44

11

27

43

10

42

29

B0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

04

03

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

20

35

02

19

34

01

33

21

D0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

36

50

45

[AOD32C1]


Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 5

A0 Y 200.0 Y 204.0 C0 Y 202.0 Y 206.0

A1 Y 200.1 Y 204.1 C1 Y 202.1 Y 206.1

A2 Y 200.2 Y 204.2 C2 Y 202.2 Y 206.2

A3 Y 200.3 Y 204.3 C3 Y 202.3 Y 206.3

A4 Y 200.4 Y 204.4 C4 Y 202.4 Y 206.4

A5 Y 200.5 Y 204.5 C5 Y 202.5 Y 206.5

A6 Y 200.6 Y 204.6 C6 Y 202.6 Y 206.6

A7 Y 200.7 Y 204.7 C7 Y 202.7 Y 206.7

B0 Y 201.0 Y 205.0 D0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

B1 Y 201.1 Y 205.1 D1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

B2 Y 201.2 Y 205.2 D2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

B3 Y 201.3 Y 205.3 D3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

B4 Y 201.4 Y 205.4 D4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

B5 Y 201.5 Y 205.5 D5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

B6 Y 201.6 Y 205.6 D6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6

B7 Y 201.7 Y 205.7 D7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 17 -




B19

B23

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A23

B22

A22

B21

A21

B20

A20

A24

A0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

B07

B11

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

A11

B10

A10

B09

A09

B08

A08

A12

C0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

B12

B13

B17

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B7

A17

B16

A16

B15

A15

B14

A14

A18

B0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

B01

B05

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

D7

A05

B04

A04

B03

A03

B02

A02

A06

D0

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

B06

B24

B18

[AOD32C2]



A0 Y 200.0 Y 204.0 C0 Y 202.0 Y 206.0

A1 Y 200.1 Y 204.1 C1 Y 202.1 Y 206.1

A2 Y 200.2 Y 204.2 C2 Y 202.2 Y 206.2

A3 Y 200.3 Y 204.3 C3 Y 202.3 Y 206.3

A4 Y 200.4 Y 204.4 C4 Y 202.4 Y 206.4

A5 Y 200.5 Y 204.5 C5 Y 202.5 Y 206.5

A6 Y 200.6 Y 204.6 C6 Y 202.6 Y 206.6

A7 Y 200.7 Y 204.7 C7 Y 202.7 Y 206.7

B0 Y 201.0 Y 205.0 D0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

B1 Y 201.1 Y 205.1 D1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

B2 Y 201.2 Y 205.2 D2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

B3 Y 201.3 Y 205.3 D3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

B4 Y 201.4 Y 205.4 D4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

B5 Y 201.5 Y 205.5 D5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

B6 Y 201.6 Y 205.6 D6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6

B7 Y 201.7 Y 205.7 D7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 18 -




41

40

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

07

24

39

06

23

38

22

37

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

09

LOAD

LOAD C7

50

49

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

16

32

48

15

31

47

30

46

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

18

LOAD

LOAD A7

45

29

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

12

28

44

11

27

43

10

42

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

14

LOAD

LOAD B7

36

21

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

03

20

35

02

19

34

01

33

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

05

LOAD

LOAD D7

[AOD32D1]



A0 Y 200.0 Y 204.0 C0 Y 202.0 Y 206.0

A1 Y 200.1 Y 204.1 C1 Y 202.1 Y 206.1

A2 Y 200.2 Y 204.2 C2 Y 202.2 Y 206.2

A3 Y 200.3 Y 204.3 C3 Y 202.3 Y 206.3

A4 Y 200.4 Y 204.4 C4 Y 202.4 Y 206.4

A5 Y 200.5 Y 204.5 C5 Y 202.5 Y 206.5

A6 Y 200.6 Y 204.6 C6 Y 202.6 Y 206.6

A7 Y 200.7 Y 204.7 C7 Y 202.7 Y 206.7

B0 Y 201.0 Y 205.0 D0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

B1 Y 201.1 Y 205.1 D1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

B2 Y 201.2 Y 205.2 D2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

B3 Y 201.3 Y 205.3 D3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

B4 Y 201.4 Y 205.4 D4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

B5 Y 201.5 Y 205.5 D5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

B6 Y 201.6 Y 205.6 D6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6

B7 Y 201.7 Y 205.7 D7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 19 -




B12

A12

C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

B11

A11

B10

A10

B09

A09

B08

A08

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A07

LOAD

LOAD C7

B24

A24

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

B23

A23

B22

A22

B21

A21

B20

A20

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A19

LOAD

LOAD A7

B18

A18

B0

B1

B2

B3

B4

B5

B6

B17

A17

B16

A16

B15

A15

B14

A14

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A13

LOAD

LOAD B7

B06

A06

D0

D1

D2

D3

D4

D5

D6

B05

A05

B04

A04

B03

A03

B02

A02

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A01

LOAD

LOAD D7

[AOD32D2]



A0 Y 200.0 Y 204.0 C0 Y 202.0 Y 206.0

A1 Y 200.1 Y 204.1 C1 Y 202.1 Y 206.1

A2 Y 200.2 Y 204.2 C2 Y 202.2 Y 206.2

A3 Y 200.3 Y 204.3 C3 Y 202.3 Y 206.3

A4 Y 200.4 Y 204.4 C4 Y 202.4 Y 206.4

A5 Y 200.5 Y 204.5 C5 Y 202.5 Y 206.5

A6 Y 200.6 Y 204.6 C6 Y 202.6 Y 206.6

A7 Y 200.7 Y 204.7 C7 Y 202.7 Y 206.7

B0 Y 201.0 Y 205.0 D0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

B1 Y 201.1 Y 205.1 D1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

B2 Y 201.2 Y 205.2 D2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

B3 Y 201.3 Y 205.3 D3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

B4 Y 201.4 Y 205.4 D4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

B5 Y 201.5 Y 205.5 D5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

B6 Y 201.6 Y 205.6 D6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6

B7 Y 201.7 Y 205.7 D7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 20 -




01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

A1

A3

A0

A2

B1

B3

B0

B2

A5

A7

A4

A6

B5

B7

B4

B6

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

V

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

V

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

V

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

LOAD

V

LOAD

[AOR08G] [AOR16G]

AOR08G AOR16G


A0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0 Y 202.0 Y 206.0

A1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1 Y 202.1 Y 206.1

A2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2 Y 202.2 Y 206.2

A3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3 Y 202.3 Y 206.3

A4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4 Y 202.4 Y 206.4

A5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5 Y 202.5 Y 206.5

A6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6 Y 202.6 Y 206.6

A7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7 Y 202.7 Y 206.7

B0 Y 203.0 Y 207.0

B1 Y 203.1 Y 207.1

B2 Y 203.2 Y 207.2

B3 Y 203.3 Y 207.3

B4 Y 203.4 Y 207.4

B5 Y 203.5 Y 207.5

B6 Y 203.6 Y 207.6

B7 Y 203.7 Y 207.7

- 21 -




- 22 -

5.2.2 I/O Link Connection Unit


Signal classification Signal address

Input signal (128 inputs) X212.0 to X227.7Output signal (128 outputs) Y212.0 to Y227.7

5.2.3 Addit ional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel


Signal classif ication Connector on I/O module No. of signals Signal address

CE56 24 X240.0 to X242.7Input signal (48 inputs)

CE57 24 X243.0 to X245.7

CE56 16 Y240.0 to Y241.7Output signal (32 outputs)

CE57 16 Y242.0 to Y243.7

Connector table

CE56 CE57

A B A B

01 0V +24A 01 0V +24A

02 X240.0 X240.1 02 X243.0 X243.1

03 X240.2 X240.3 03 X243.2 X243.3

04 X240.4 X240.5 04 X243.4 X243.5

05 X240.6 X240.7 05 X243.6 X243.7

06 X241.0 X241.1 06 X244.0 X244.1

07 X241.2 X241.3 07 X244.2 X244.3

08 X241.4 X241.5 08 X244.4 X244.5

09 X241.6 X241.7 09 X244.6 X244.710 X242.0 X242.1 10 X245.0 X245.1

11 X242.2 X242.3 11 X245.2 X245.3

12 X242.4 X242.5 12 X245.4 X245.5

13 X242.6 X242.7 13 X245.6 X245.7

14 DICOM0 14 DICOM5

15 15

16 Y240.0 Y240.1 16 Y242.0 Y242.1

17 Y240.2 Y240.3 17 Y242.2 Y242.3

18 Y240.4 Y240.5 18 Y242.4 Y242.5

19 Y240.6 Y240.7 19 Y242.6 Y242.7

20 Y241.0 Y241.1 20 Y243.0 Y243.1

21 Y241.2 Y241.3 21 Y243.2 Y243.3

22 Y241.4 Y241.5 22 Y243.4 Y243.5

23 Y241.6 Y241.7 23 Y243.6 Y243.7

24 DOCOM DOCOM 24 DOCOM DOCOM

25 DOCOM DOCOM 25 DOCOM DOCOM

Note) +24A on CE56-B01 and CE57-B01 are 24V d.c. internal power supply from wiring PCB.

Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.




Addi tional I/O uni ts for sub-operator's panel : Connection of input signals (1)I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+24A CPD1

(01)

(DICOM0)

X240.0

R V

(A14)

(A01)

(02)

CE56(B01)

X240.1

X240.2

X240.3

X240.4

X240.5

X240.6

X240.7

X241.0

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

(A02)

(B02)

(A03)

(B03)

(A04)

(B04)

(A05)

(B05)

(A06)

(B06)

(A07)

(B07)

(A08)

(B08)

(A09)

(B09)

X241.1

X241.2

X241.3

X241.4

X241.5

X241.6

X241.7

+24A

0V

- 23 -




CE56(A10)

(B10)

(A11)

(B11)

(A12)

(B12)

(A13)

(B13)

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

X242.0

X242.1

X242.2

X242.3

X242.4

X242.5

X242.6

X242.7

- 24 -




Addi tional I/O uni ts for sub-operator's panel : Connection of input signals (2)I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+24A CPD1

(01)

X243.0

R V

(A01)

(02)

CE57(B01)

X243.1

X243.2

X243.3

X243.4

X243.5

X243.6

X243.7

X244.0

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

(A02)

(B02)

(A03)

(B03)

(A04)

(B04)

(A05)

(B05)

(A06)

(B06)

(A07)

(B07)

(A08)

(B08)

(A09)

(B09)

X244.1

X244.2

X244.3

X244.4

X244.5

X244.6

X244.7

+24A

0V

- 25 -




CE57(A10)

(B10)

(A11)

(B11)

(A12)

(B12)

(A13)

(B13)

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

R V

X245.0

X245.1

X245.2

X245.3

X245.4

X245.5

X245.6

X245.7

(B14)(DICOM5)

NOTEX240.0 through X240.7 and X245.0 through X245.7 are DI pins for which acommon voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the DICOM0CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin to the +24V d.c. power supply, a DI

signal can be input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cable isconnected to ground, it has the same effect as inputting an ON state DI signal.To prevent this from occurring,the connection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) andDICOM5 CE57(B14) pins to the 0V power supply is recommended whereeverpossible.For the unconnected pins at the addresses for which the commonvoltage is fixed, the input is “0”. For the unconnected pins at the addresses forwhich a common voltage can be selected, the input is “0” when the DICOMxcommon select pin is connected to the 0 V power supply or “1” when it isconnected to the +24 V d.c. power supply. Connect DICOM0 and DICOM5when used. When addresses from X240.0 to X240.7 and X245.0 to X245.7 arenot used, connect DICOM0 and DICOM5 to the 0V power supply.

- 26 -




Addi tional I/O uni ts for sub-operator 's panel: Connection of output signals(1)

(A16)

(B16)

D V

D V

DOCOM CE56(A24),(B24)(A25),(B25)

Y240.1

Y240.2

Y240.3

Y240.4

Y240.5

Y240.6

Y240.0

Y240.7

Y241.1

Y241.2

Y241.3

Y241.4

Y241.5

Y241.6

Y241.0

Y241.7

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

(A17)

(B17)

(A18)

(B18)

(A19)

(B19)

(A20)

(B20)

(A21)

(B21)

(A22)

(B22)

(A23)

(B23)

V+ 0V

24V d.c. EXTERNAL

POWER SUPPLY

0V

I/O module

A20B-2004-0691

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57.

It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57.

- 27 -




Addi tional I/O uni ts for sub-operator 's panel: Connection of output signals(2)

I/O module

A20B-2004-0691

(A16)

(B16)

D V

D V

DOCOM CE57(A24),(B24)(A25),(B25)

Y242.1

Y242.2

Y242.3

Y242.4

Y242.5

Y242.6

Y242.0

Y242.7

Y243.1

Y243.2

Y243.3

Y243.4

Y243.5

Y243.6

Y243.0

Y243.7

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

D V

(A17)

(B17)

(A18)

(B18)

(A19)

(B19)

(A20)

(B20)

(A21)

(B21)

(A22)

(B22)

(A23)

(B23)

V+ 0V

24V d.c. EXTERNAL

POWER SUPPLY

0V

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to CE56 or CE57.It need not be connected to both CE56 and CE57.

- 28 -




5.2.3.1 Terminal Module B

This module is connected to additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel to relay input/output signals

via a screw terminal block. Up to two terminal modules can be mounted.

In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal c lassi ficat ion Terminal Module No. of s ignals Signal address

1st module (#1) 24 X240.0 to X242.7Input signal (48 inputs)

2nd module (#2) 24 X243.0 to X245.7

1st module (#1) 16 Y240.0 to Y241.7Output signal (32 outputs)

2nd module (#2) 16 Y242.0 to Y243.7

Terminal module B#1 A03B-0815-C022

JD1A

24 inputs

(X240.0 to X242.7)

16 outputs

(Y240.0 to Y241.7)

24V d.c. externalpower supply(DOCOM)

CE70

CE70

CPD1

CE56

CE57

J D1 A

J D1 B

24V d.c. power supply

from Wriing PCB

(+24A) I/O module A20B-2002-0691

Wiring PCB

A16B-1110-0520

Terminal module B#2

A03B-0815-C022

24 inputs

(X243.0 to X245.7)

16 outputs

(Y242.0 to Y243.7)

* Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2. It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.

- 29 -




Pin layout of terminal module B (#1) [Connection between CE56 and CE70]

CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)

A1 0V B1 +24A

A2 X240.0 B2 X240.1 A3 X240.2 B3 X240.3

A4 X240.4 B4 X240.5

A5 X240.6 B5 X240.7

A6 X241.0 B6 X241.1

A7 X241.2 B7 X241.3

A8 X241.4 B8 X241.5

A9 X241.6 B9 X241.7

A10 X242.0 B10 X242.1

A11 X242.2 B11 X242.3

A12 X242.4 B12 X242.5

A13 X242.6 B13 X242.7

A14 DICOM0 B14

A15 B15

A16 Y240.0 B16 Y240.1

A17 Y240.2 B17 Y240.3

A18 Y240.4 B18 Y240.5

A19 Y240.6 B19 Y240.7

A20 Y241.0 B20 Y241.1

A21 Y241.2 B21 Y241.3

A22 Y241.4 B22 Y241.5

A23 Y241.6 B23 Y241.7

A24 DOCOM B24 DOCOM

A25 DOCOM B25 DOCOM

XT70A (YOSHIDA PX7-32A) XT70B (YOSHIDA PX7-32A)

1 0V

2 DICOM0

3 X240.2

4 X240.3

5 DICOM0

6 X240.6

7 X240.7

8 +24A

9 X241.2

10 X241.311 +24A

12 X241.6

13 X241.7

14 +24A

15 X242.2

16 X242.3

1 +24A

2 X242.6

3 X242.7

4 0V

5 Y240.2

6 Y240.3

7 0V

8 Y240.6

9 Y240.7

10 0V11 Y241.2

12 Y241.3

13 0V

14 Y241.6

15 Y241.7

16 0V

17 0V

18 DICOM0

19 X240.0

20 X240.1

21 DICOM0

22 X240.4

23 X240.5

24 +24A

25 X241.0

26 X241.1

27 +24A28 X241.4

29 X241.5

30 +24A

31 X242.0

32 X242.1

17 +24A

18 X242.4

19 X242.5

20 0V

21 Y240.0

22 Y240.1

23 0V

24 Y240.4

25 Y240.5

26 0V

27 Y241.028 Y241.1

29 0V

30 Y241.4

31 Y241.5

32 DOCOM

NOTE+24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal powersupply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but

no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2. As for DICOM0, see the circuit diagram on later pages.

- 30 -




Pin layout of terminal module B (#2) [Connection between CE57 and CE70]

CE70 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)

A1 0V B1 +24A

A2 X243.0 B2 X243.1 A3 X243.2 B3 X243.3

A4 X243.4 B4 X243.5

A5 X243.6 B5 X243.7

A6 X244.0 B6 X244.1

A7 X244.2 B7 X244.3

A8 X244.4 B8 X244.5

A9 X244.6 B9 X244.7

A10 X245.0 B10 X245.1

A11 X245.2 B11 X245.3

A12 X245.4 B12 X245.5

A13 X245.6 B13 X245.7

A14 B14 DICOM5

A15 B15

A16 Y242.0 B16 Y242.1

A17 Y242.2 B17 Y242.3

A18 Y242.4 B18 Y242.5

A19 Y242.6 B19 Y242.7

A20 Y243.0 B20 Y243.1

A21 Y243.2 B21 Y243.3

A22 Y243.4 B22 Y243.5

A23 Y243.6 B23 Y243.7

A24 DOCOM B24 DOCOM

A25 DOCOM B25 DOCOM


1 0V

2 DICOM5

3 X243.2

4 X243.3

5 DICOM5

6 X243.6

7 X243.7

8 +24A

9 X244.2

10 X244.311 +24A

12 X244.6

13 X244.7

14 +24A

15 X245.2

16 X245.3

1 +24A

2 X245.6

3 X245.7

4 0V

5 Y242.2

6 Y242.3

7 0V

8 Y242.6

9 Y242.7

10 0V11 Y243.2

12 Y243.3

13 0V

14 Y243.6

15 Y243.7

16 0V

17 0V

18 DICOM5

19 X243.0

20 X243.1

21 DICOM5

22 X243.4

23 X243.5

24 +24A

25 X244.0

26 X244.1

27 +24A28 X244.4

29 X244.5

30 +24A

31 X245.0

32 X245.1

17 +24A

18 X245.4

19 X245.5

20 0V

21 Y242.0

22 Y242.1

23 0V

24 Y242.4

25 Y242.5

26 0V

27 Y243.028 Y243.1

29 0V

30 Y243.4

31 Y243.5

32 DOCOM

NOTE+24A on CE70-B01, XT70A-8, 11, 14, 24, 27, and 30 are 24V d.c. internal powersupply from wiring PCB. Do not connect 24V d.c. external power supply there.DOCOM on XT70B-32 should be connected to 24V d.c. external power supply, but

no need to connect external power supply to both module #1 and module #2. As for DICOM5, see the circuit diagram on later pages.

- 31 -




Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #1

I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+ 2 4 A

0 V

Terminal module B#1

+24A CPD1

(01)

DICOM0

X240.0 (A02)

(B02)

(A14)

CE70(B01)

XB1

XB2

RV

(A14)

XT70A(18) (19)

(20)(2)(3)

(4) (21) (22)

(23)(5)(6)

(7)

(25)(24)

(26)(8)(9)

(10)

(27)(28)

(29)(11)(12)

(13)

Wiring PCB

+24 0V

(A01) (A01)

(02)

CE56(B01)

X240.1

X240.2

X240.3

X240.4

X240.5

X240.6

X240.7

X241.0

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

+24 0V

(A03)

(B03)

(A04)

(B04)

(A05)

(B05)

(A06)

(B06)

(A07)

(B07)

(A08)

(B08)

(A09)

(B09)

(A02)

(B02)

(A03)

(B03)

(A04)

(B04)

(A05)

(B05)

(A06)

(B06)

(A07)

(B07)

(A08)

(B08)

(A09)

(B09)

X241.1

X241.2

X241.3

X241.4

X241.5

X241.6

X241.7

XS09

(A05)(B05)

+24A

- 32 -




+ 2 4 A

CE56(A10)

(B10)

(A11)

(B11)

(A12)

(B12)

(A13)

(B13)

CE70(A10)

(B10)

(A11)

(B11)

(A12)

(B12)

(A13)

(B13)

RV(31)

(32)

(14)(15)

(16)

(18)

(19)

(1)(2)

(3)

XT70A(30)

XT70B(17)

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

X242.0

X242.1

X242.2

X242.3

X242.4

X242.5

X242.6

X242.7

I/O module A20B-2004-0691 Terminal module B#1

NOTEX240.0 to X240.7 are DI pins that allows common signal selection. Specifically,when setting terminal XB1 is set to 0 V and setting terminal XB2 is set to +24,

and DICOM0 is connected to 24V d.c., DI signals with logic inverted can beinput. In this case, if a cable ground-fault accident occurs, a state equivalent tothe DI signal ON state is observed. From the point of view of safety, settingterminal XB1 should be set to +24 and XB2 be set to 0 V, where possible, sothat 0 V is applied to DICOM0.

- 33 -




Input signal (DI) circuit diagram of terminal module B #2

I/O module A20B-2004-0691

+ 2 4 A

0 V

Terminal module B#2

+24A CPD1

(01)

X243.0 (A02)

(B02)

CE70(B01)

RV

XT70A(30) (19)

(20)(14)(3)

(4) XT70B(17) XT70A(22)

(23)XT70B(1)XT70A(6)

(7)

(25)(24)

(26)(8)(9)

(10)

(27)(28)

(29)(11)(12)

(13)

(A01) (A01)

(02)

CE57(B01)

X243.1

X243.2

X243.3

X243.4

X243.5

X243.6

X243.7

X244.0

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

(A03)

(B03)

(A04)

(B04)

(A05)

(B05)

(A06)

(B06)

(A07)

(B07)

(A08)

(B08)

(A09)

(B09)

(A02)

(B02)

(A03)

(B03)

(A04)

(B04)

(A05)

(B05)

(A06)

(B06)

(A07)

(B07)

(A08)

(B08)

(A09)

(B09)

X244.1

X244.2

X244.3

X244.4

X244.5

X244.6

X244.7

Wiring PCB

XS09

(A05)(B05)

+24A

- 34 -




CE57(A10)

(B10)

(A11)

(B11)

(A12)

(B12)

(A13)

(B13)

CE70(A10)

(B10)

(A11)

(B11)

(A12)

(B12)

(A13)

(B13)

RV(31)

(32)

(2)(15)

(16)

XT70B(18)

(19)

XT70A(5)XT70B(2)

(3)

XT70A(18)

(21)

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

X245.0

X245.1

X245.2

X245.3

X245.4

X245.5

X245.6

X245.7

DICOM5 (B14)

XB2

(B14)

+24 0V

XB1+24 0V

+ 2 4 A

0 V

I/O module A20B-2004-0691 Terminal module B#2

NOTEX245.0 to X245.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to"0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM5 to 24V d.c., the logic of the DI signal

can be inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in thecable, the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, werecommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM5to 0V whenever possible.

- 35 -




Output signal (DO) circuit d iagram of terminal module B #2 address enclosed in ()

0 V

(A16)

(B16)

(A16)

(B16)

(A17)

(B17)

(22) (4)(5)

(6) (23) (24)

(25) (7)

(8)

(9)

(21)

(27)(26)

(28)(10)(11)

(12)(29)(30)

(31)(13)(14)

(15)

DV

DV

Relay

Relay

XT70B(20)

DOCOMXT70B(32)

CE56, (CE57)(A24),(B24)(A25),(B25)

(16) XT70A(1)(17)

Y240.1 (Y242.1)

Y240.2 (Y242.2)

Y240.3 (Y243.3)

Y240.4 (Y242.4)

Y240.5 (Y242.5)

Y240.6 (Y242.6)

Y240.0 (Y242.0)

Y240.7 (Y242.7)

Y241.1 (Y243.1)

Y241.2 (Y243.2)

Y241.3 (Y243.3)

Y241.4 (Y243.3)

Y241.5 (Y243.5)

Y241.6 (Y243.6)

Y241.0 (Y243.0)

Y241.7 (Y243.7)

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

CE70(A24),(B24)(A25),(B25)

(A18)

(B18)

(A19)

(B19)

(A20)

(B20)

(A21)

(B21)

(A22)

(B22)

(A23)

(B23)

(A17)

(B17)

(A18)

(B18)

(A19)

(B19)

(A20)

(B20)

(A21)

(B21)

(A22)

(B22)

(A23)

(B23)

External 24 VDCpower supply

(－)

(＋)

I/O module A20B-2004-0691 Terminal module B#1(#2)

Connect the 24 V d.c. external power supply to #1 or #2.

It need not be connected to both #1 and #2.

- 36 -




5.2.4 Addit ional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module)

I/O modules, terminal modules, and connection cables can be used to relay input/output signals via a

screw terminal block. You can expand the number of inputs to up to 96 and the number of outputs to up

to 64.

In the case of standard setting, the following addresses can be used: Signal

classification

I/O module Terminal module No. of signals Signal address

I/O module B1 1st module (#1) 24 X228.0 to X230.7

1st I/O module E1 (#1) 2nd module (#2) 24 X231.0 to X233.7

2nd I/O module E1 (#2) 3rd module (#3) 24 X234.0 to X236.7

Input signal

(96 inputs)

3rd I/O module E1 (#3) 4th module (#4) 24 X237.0 to X239.7

I/O module B1 1st module (#1) 16 Y228.0 to Y229.7

1st I/O module E1 (#1) 2nd module (#2) 16 Y230.0 to Y231.7

2nd I/O module E1 (#2) 3rd module (#3) 16 Y232.0 to Y233.7

Output signal

(64 outputs)

3rd I/O module E1 (#3) 4th module (#4) 16 Y234.0 to Y235.7

Terminal module #1 A03B-0815-C020

JD1A

24 inputs(X228.0 to X230.7)

16 outputs

(Y228.0 to Y229.7)

24 V d.c. external power supply 1

24 V d.c. external power supply 2

(Both are additionally required.)

I/O module B1 A03B-0824-C001

1st I/O module E1 (#1)

A03B-0824-C003

CA52

CB150

CA53

J D1 B

CA52

CB150

CA53

CA52

CA53

XP150

XP150

XP150

XP150

2nd I/O module E1 (#2)

A03B-0824-C003

3rd I/O module E1 (#3) A03B-0824-C003

I/O Link cable

Flat cables

Inter-module connection cable

CB150

CB150

CA52

Wiring PCB

A16B-1110-0520




24 inputs

(X231.0 to X233.7)

16 outputs

(Y230.0 to Y231.7)

24 inputs

(X234.0 to X236.7)

16 outputs

(Y232.0 to Y233.7)

24 inputs

(X237.0 to X239.7)

16 outputs

(Y234.0 to Y235.7)

- 37 -




Mounting diagram

Flat cables

I/O module B1 A03B-0824-C001

1st I/O module E1 (#1)

A03B-0824-C003 2nd I/O module E1 (#2)

A03B-0824-C003 3rd I/O module E1 (#3)

A03B-0824-C003

- 38 -




Connector table of terminal module #1 connected to I/O module B1

XP150 (HIROSE HIF3CB-50PA-2.54DSA)

- 39 -

A1 +24V2 B1 Y229.0

A2 +24V2 B2 Y228.0 A3 0V B3 0V

A4 Y229.1 B4 Y229.2

A5 Y228.1 B5 Y228.2

A6 0V B6 0V

A7 Y229.3 B7 Y229.4

A8 Y228.3 B8 Y228.4

A9 0V B9 DICOM0

A10 Y229.5 B10 Y229.6

A11 Y228.5 B11 Y228.6

A12 X229.0 B12 X229.1

A13 Y229.7 B13 X230.0

A14 Y228.7 B14 X228.0

A15 X229.2 B15 X229.3

A16 X230.1 B16 X230.2

A17 X228.1 B17 X228.2

A18 X229.4 B18 X229.5

A19 X230.3 B19 X230.4

A20 X228.3 B20 X228.4

A21 X229.6 B21 X229.7

A22 X230.5 B22 X230.6

A23 X228.5 B23 X228.6

A24 X230.7 B24 +24V1

A25 X228.7 B25 +24V1

Number of signals and addresses24 inputs (X228.0 to X230.7)

16 outputs (Y228.0 to Y229.7)


1 0V

2 DICOM

3 X228.2

4 X228.3

5 DICOM

6 X228.6

7 X228.7

8 +24V2

9 X229.2

10 X229.3

11 +24V2

12 X229.6

13 X229.7

14 +24V2

15 X230.2

16 X230.3

1 +24V2

2 X230.6

3 X230.7

4 0V

5 Y228.2

6 Y228.3

7 0V

8 Y228.6

9 Y228.7

10 0V

11 Y229.2

12 Y229.3

13 0V

14 Y229.6

15 Y229.7

16 0V

17 +24V2

18 DICOM

19 X228.0

20 X228.1

21 DICOM

22 X228.4

23 X228.5

24 +24V2

25 X229.0

26 X229.127 +24V2

28 X229.4

29 X229.5

30 +24V2

31 X230.0

32 X230.1

17 +24V2

18 X230.4

19 X230.5

20 0V

21 Y228.0

22 Y228.1

23 0V

24 Y228.4

25 Y228.5

26 0V27 Y229.0

28 Y229.1

29 0V

30 Y229.4

31 Y229.5

32 +24V1

NOTE+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.

+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 aresignal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2. As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.




Connector table of terminal module #2 connected to 1st I/O module E1 (#1)


- 40 -

A1 +24V2 B1 Y231.0

A2 +24V2 B2 Y230.0 A3 0V B3 0V

A4 Y231.1 B4 Y231.2

A5 Y230.1 B5 Y230.2

A6 0V B6 0V

A7 Y231.3 B7 Y231.4

A8 Y230.3 B8 Y230.4

A9 0V B9 DICOM0

A10 Y231.5 B10 Y231.6

A11 Y230.5 B11 Y230.6

A12 X232.0 B12 X232.1

A13 Y231.7 B13 X233.0

A14 Y230.7 B14 X231.0

A15 X232.2 B15 X232.3

A16 X233.1 B16 X233.2

A17 X231.1 B17 X231.2

A18 X232.4 B18 X232.5

A19 X233.3 B19 X233.4

A20 X231.3 B20 X231.4

A21 X232.6 B21 X232.7

A22 X233.5 B22 X233.6

A23 X231.5 B23 X231.6

A24 X233.7 B24 +24V1

A25 X231.7 B25+24V1


16 outputs (Y230.0 to Y231.7)


1 0V

2 DICOM

3 X231.2

4 X231.3

5 DICOM

6 X231.6

7 X231.7

8 +24V2

9 X232.2

10 X232.3

11 +24V2

12 X232.6

13 X232.7

14 +24V2

15 X233.2

16 X233.3

1 +24V2

2 X233.6

3 X233.7

4 0V

5 Y230.2

6 Y230.3

7 0V

8 Y230.6

9 Y230.7

10 0V

11 Y231.2

12 Y231.3

13 0V

14 Y231.6

15 Y231.7

16 0V

17 +24V2

18 DICOM

19 X231.0

20 X231.1

21 DICOM

22 X231.4

23 X231.5

24 +24V2

25 X232.0

26 X232.127 +24V2

28 X232.4

29 X232.5

30 +24V2

31 X233.0

32 X233.1

17 +24V2

18 X233.4

19 X233.5

20 0V

21 Y230.0

22 Y230.1

23 0V

24 Y230.4

25 Y230.5

26 0V27 Y231.0

28 Y231.1

29 0V

30 Y231.4

31 Y231.5

32 +24V1

NOTE+24V1 on XP150-B24, B25 and XT150B-32 are I/O module control power supply,and should be connected to 24 V d.c. exterrnal power supply 1.+24V2 on XP150-A1, XT150A-8, 11, 14, 17, 24, 27, 30, XT150B-1 and 17 are

signal power supply, and should be connected to 24 V d.c. external power supply 2. As for DICOM0 and DICOM, see the circuit diagram on later pages.




Connector table of terminal module #3 connected to 2nd I/O module E1 (#2)


- 41 -

A1 +24V2 B1 Y233.0

A2 +24V2 B2 Y232.0 A3 0V B3 0V

A4 Y233.1 B4 Y233.2

A5 Y232.1 B5 Y232.2

A6 0V B6 0V

A7 Y233.3 B7 Y233.4

A8 Y232.3 B8 Y232.4

A9 0V B9 DICOM0

A10 Y233.5 B10 Y233.6

A11 Y232.5 B11 Y232.6

A12 X235.0 B12 X235.1

A13 Y233.7 B13 X236.0

A14 Y232.7 B14 X234.0

A15 X234.2 B15 X235.3

A16 X236.1 B16 X236.2

A17 X234.1 B17 X234.2

A18 X235.4 B18 X235.5

A19 X236.3 B19 X236.4

A20 X234.3 B20 X234.4

A21 X235.6 B21 X235.7

A22 X236.5 B22 X236.6

A23 X234.5 B23 X234.6

A24 X236.7 B24 +24V1

A25 X234.7 B25 +24V1


16 outputs (Y232.0 to Y233.7)


1 0V

2 DICOM

3 X234.2

4 X234.3

5 DICOM

6 X234.6

7 X234.7

8 +24V2

9 X235.2

10 X235.3

11 +24V2

12 X235.6

13 X235.7

14 +24V2

15 X236.2

16 X236.3

1 +24V2

2 X236.6

3 X236.7

4 0V

5 Y232.2

6 Y232.3

7 0V

8 Y232.6

9 Y232.7

10 0V

11 Y233.2

12 Y233.3

13 0V

14 Y233.6

15 Y233.7

16 0V

17 +24V2

18 DICOM

19 X234.0

20 X234.1

21 DICOM

22 X234.4

23 X234.5

24 +24V2

25 X235.0

26 X235.127 +24V2

28 X235.4

29 X235.5

30 +24V2

31 X236.0

32 X236.1

17 +24V2

18 X236.4

19 X236.5

20 0V

21 Y232.0

22 Y232.1

23 0V

24 Y232.4

25 Y232.5

26 0V27 Y233.0

28 Y233.1

29 0V

30 Y233.4

31 Y233.5

32 +24V1






Connector table of terminal module #4 connected to 3rd I/O module E1 (#3)


A1 +24V2 B1 Y235.0

A2 +24V2 B2 Y234.0 A3 0V B3 0V

A4 Y235.1 B4 Y235.2

A5 Y234.1 B5 Y234.2

A6 0V B6 0V

A7 Y235.3 B7 Y235.4

A8 Y234.3 B8 Y234.4

A9 0V B9 DICOM0

A10 Y235.5 B10 Y235.6

A11 Y234.5 B11 Y234.6

A12 X238.0 B12 X238.1

A13 Y235.7 B13 X239.0

A14 Y234.7 B14 X237.0

A15 X238.2 B15 X238.3

A16 X239.1 B16 X239.2

A17 X237.1 B17 X237.2

A18 X238.4 B18 X238.5

A19 X239.3 B19 X239.4

A20 X237.3 B20 X237.4

A21 X238.6 B21 X238.7

A22 X239.5 B22 X239.6

A23 X237.5 B23 X237.6

A24 X239.7 B24 +24V1

A25 X237.7 B25 +24V1


16 outputs (Y234.0 to Y235.7)


1 0V

2 DICOM

3 X237.2

4 X237.3

5 DICOM

6 X237.6

7 X237.7

8 +24V2

9 X238.2

10 X238.3

11 +24V2

12 X238.6

13 X238.7

14 +24V2

15 X239.2

16 X239.3

1 +24V2

2 X239.6

3 X239.7

4 0V

5 Y234.2

6 Y234.3

7 0V

8 Y234.6

9 Y234.7

10 0V

11 Y235.2

12 Y235.3

13 0V

14 Y235.6

15 Y235.7

16 0V

17 +24V2

18 DICOM

19 X237.0

20 X237.1

21 DICOM

22 X237.4

23 X237.5

24 +24V2

25 X238.0

26 X238.127 +24V2

28 X238.4

29 X238.5

30 +24V2

31 X239.0

32 X239.1

17 +24V2

18 X239.4

19 X239.5

20 0V

21 Y234.0

22 Y234.1

23 0V

24 Y234.4

25 Y234.5

26 0V27 Y235.0

28 Y235.1

29 0V

30 Y235.4

31 Y235.5

32 +24V1



- 42 -




< Input signal (DI) circuit diagram >

0V

0 V

+ 2 4 V 2

Terminal moduleConnector panel I/O module

+24V1

CB150(18)

(50)

(42)

(43)

(44)

(45)

(46)

(47)

(48)

(49)

DICOM0

Xm+0.0

Xm+0.1

Xm+0.2

Xm+0.3

Xm+0.4

Xm+0.5

Xm+0.6

Xm+0.7

Xm+1.0

Xm+1.7

Xm+1.6

Xm+1.5

Xm+1.4

Xm+1.3

Xm+1.2

Xm+1.1

(25)

(B14)

(A17)

(B17)

(A20)

(B20)

(A23)

(B23)

(A25)

(B09)

XP150(B24)

(B25)

XT150B

(32)XB1

XB2

RV

(26)

(27)

(28)

(29)

(30)

(31)

(32)

(24)

(A12)

(B12)

(A15)

(B15)

(A18)

(B18)

(A21)

(B21)

XT150A(17)

(19)

(20)(2)(3)

(4)(21)(22)

(23)(5)(6)

(7)

(18)

(25)(24)

(26)(8)(9)

(10)(27)(28)

(29)(11)(12)

(13)

(A03),(B03),(A06),(B06), A09

XT150A (1),XT150B (16)

+24V1

+24V2 0V

DC24V Power 1

(19),(20),(21),(22),(23)

+24 0V

+24 0V

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

DC24V Power 2

- 43 -




XT150B(17)

+ 2 4 V 2

+ 2 4 V

2

Connector panel I/O module

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

RV

CB150(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

Xm+2.0

Xm+2.1

Xm+2.2

Xm+2.3

Xm+2.4

Xm+2.5

Xm+2.6

Xm+2.7

XP150(B13)

(A16)

(B16)

(A19)

(B19)

(A22)

(B22)

(A24)

RV

RV

(31)

(32)

(14)(15)

(16)

(18)

(19)

(1)(2)

(3)

XT150A(30)

Terminal module

Basic module: Xm = 228

Expansion module 1: Xm = 231



NOTEXm+0.1 to Xm+0.7 can be selected as common DI; that is, by setting pin XB1 to"0V" and XB2 to "+24" to connect DICOM to +24V, the logic of the DI signal canbe inverted before being input. If, in this case, a ground fault occurs in the cable,the DI signal is regarded to be in the ON state. For safety, therefore, werecommend that you set pin XB1 to "+24" and XB2 to "0V" to connect DICOM to0V whenever possible.

The setting terminals are factory-set as follows:Setting terminal XB1: +24

Setting terminal XB2: 0V

- 44 -




< Output signal (DO) circuit diagram >

+ 2 4 V 2

0

V

Terminal moduleConnector panel I/O module

CB150(01),(33)

(34)

(35)

(36)

(37)

(38)

(39)

(40)

(41)

Yn+0.0

Yn+0.1

Yn+0.2

Yn+0.3

Yn+0.4

Yn+0.5

Yn+0.6

Yn+0.7

Yn+1.0

Yn+1.7

Yn+1.6

Yn+1.5

Yn+1.4

Yn+1.3

Yn+1.2

Yn+1.1

(02)

(B02)

(A05)

(B05)

(A08)

(B08)

(A11)

(B11)

(A14)

XP150(A01),(A02)

(03)

(04)

(05)

(06)

(07)

(08)

(09)

(B01)

(A04)

(B04)

(A07)

(B07)

(A10)

(B10)

(A13)

(22) (4) (5)

(6) (23) (24)

(25) (7) (8)

(9)

(21)

(27) (26)

(28) (10) (11)

(12) (29) (30)

(31) (13)

(14)

(15)

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

Relay

Relay

XT150B(20)

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

DV

+24V2

Basic module: Yn = 228

Expansion module 1: Yn = 230



- 45 -




- 46 -

5.2.5 Optional I/O Module Connection

JD1A

Wiring PCB

Optional I/O modules must be connected in series by using the I/O Link interface. Connect the modules

in the following sequence:

In the case of standard setting, connect the modules in the sequence indicated below.

Wiring PCB: JD1A

|

Group 0: I/O Unit Model-A

|

Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit

|

Group 2: Additional I/O-1

|

Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operator’s Panel

Example: I/O Link Connection Unit and additional I/O units for the sub-operator's panel.

Wiring PCB: JD1A

|

Group 1: I/O Link Connection Unit

|

Group 3: Additional I/O Units for Sub-Operator’s Panel

• Connect the modules in the ascending order of group numbers starting from the connector panel.

• Unused modules need not be connected.

5.2.6 Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are Used

When using optional I/O modules, set the following parameters: K932#0=1 I/O Unit Model-A

K932#1=1 I/O Link connection unit K932#2=1 Additional I/O-1 K932#3=1 Additional I/O units for sub-operator's panel

SUPPLEMENT

The screen for setting keep relays in the nine hundreds can be displayed bypressing the emergency stop button.



B-85314EN-1/01 6.ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC

- 47 -

6 ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOMPMC

The following addresses are available to custom PMC.

Address

typeSymbol Function Editing Address

X --- Input from external device to

custom PMC

Input only X0.0 to X5.7 (CH1)

X200.0 to X327.7 (CH2)

Y --- Output from custom PMC to

external device

Input and output Y0.0 to Y3.7 (CH1)

Y200.0 to Y327.7 (CH2)

Work register Input and output R2000.0-R2999.7

SI**_* Input from system ladder

program to custom PMC

Input only

R

SO**_* Output from custom PMC to

system ladder program

Input and output

See Chapter 12.

A --- Alarm operator message

display request

Input and output A100.0 to A149.7

D --- Non-volatile memory (allows

setting of parameters)

Input and output D7000 to D7999

D7000.0 to D7999.7

K --- Non-volatile register (allows

setting of parameters)

Input and output K35#0 to K44#7

Timers and counters can use the following numbers.

Timer/Counter No.Variable timer 121 to 200 (T240 to T398)Timer

Fixed timer 1 to 140

Counter 40 to 69 (C156 to C274)

The following subprogram numbers can be used:

Subprogram number P1500 to P5000

The following special auxiliary relay numbers can be used:

Common to DIFU/DIFD 1 to 100



7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS B-85314EN-1/01

7 INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS

To input alphabetic characters, use the corresponding soft keys (in the case of the standard operator's panel)

Press the <alphabetic letter input> key on the operator's panel.

Press

Soft keys are displayed as follows.

[In half mode]

O G F M S T X Y Z ;

H I J K P Q R < > ;

N / B C D FULL ABC/

abc ALTER DELETE ;

[In full mode]

A B C D E F G H I J

K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z SPACE < > ;

+ - * / = ? # & @ ;

( ) [ ] , " ' _ \ ;

: % $ ! ∼ HALF ABC/

abc ALTER DELETE ;

Use the rightmost and leftmost soft keys to change the alphabetic characters.

- 48 -



B-85314EN-1/01 7.INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS

- 49 -

To switch between half and full modes, use the procedure below.

[Switch from half mode to full mode]

N / B C D FULL ABC/

abc

ALTER DELETE ;

Press

[Switch from full mode to half mode]

: % $ ! ∼ HALF ABC/

abc ALTER DELETE ;

Press

Press

To leave alphabetic character input mode, press the <alphabetic letter input> key again on the operator's

panel.



8.EDITING B-85314EN-1/01

8 EDITING

You can edit ladder and other programs on the PMC screen.

CAUTIONWith this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. When editingladder programs, messages, symbols, comments, and so forth, check that "2NDPMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.Never perform editing or deleting with the first PMC.

8.1 STARTING AN EDITING SESSION

[Turn the power ON]

↓

[Press the emergency stop button]

↓

[Display the PMC screen] (If the QUICK screen is displayed, press the <QUICK/NC> button on the

operator's panel to display the CNC screen.)

Display the CNC SYSTEM-SYSTEM screen.

or →

Press the above keys:

↓

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times until the following soft keys are displayed:

Each soft key corresponds to functions as listed below. Display a desired screen.

PMC MAINTE: Displays the signal status, and sets the trace function and PMC parameters.

PMC LADDER: Lists and edits a ladder program.

PMC CONFIG: Lists and edits titles, messages, and comments.

- 50 -



B-85314EN-1/01 8.EDITING

8.2 EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS

8.2.1 Switching to the Edit Screen

[Switch to the ladder diagram screen]Press soft key [PMC LADDER].

↓

Press the soft key [(OPRT)].

↓

Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if

necessary.)

↓

Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.

- 51 -




[Select the edit area]Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) by using the cursor keys on the operator's panel then press the

soft key [ZOOM].

If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key

[LADDER].

- 52 -




[Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR]To switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR, press soft key [EDIT] on PMC LADDER

DIAGRAM MONITOR. (The [EDIT] key is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)

8.2.2 Editing Ladder Programs

Ladder programs may be created between "SUB71" and "SUB72".

May be created inthis area.

Press the rightmost soft key [+] to change the displayed soft keys.

CAUTION

Never delete or edit functional instructions "SUB71" and "SUB72".Do not create ladder programs outside the "SUB71" to "SUB72" area.

- 53 -




- 54 -

Menu on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen

Soft key Function

LIST Lists ladder programs. (Not used.)

SEARCH MENU Displays the search menu in the soft key area.

CREATE Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to add a new net at the cursor position.ZOOM Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder

program. If the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program will

be executed immediately.

CREATE NET Displays the PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen to edit the net at the cursor position.

AUTO Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter numbers.

SELECT Used to specify more than one net to perform an edit operation such as [DELETE], [CUT],

and [COPY]. Press soft key [SELECT] to specify the start of the range to be selected, then

use the cursor movement keys or the search function to specify the end of the range. After

selecting nets, press the desired edit soft key to perform that edit operation.

DELETE Deletes a selected net. When deleted, the net will be lost. If you want to restore the deleted

net, you must use soft key [RESTRE] to return the entire ladder program to the state in which

it was before the edit operation.

CUT Removes a selected net and places it in the clipboard. To paste the net, use soft key

[PASTE].

COPY Makes a copy of a selected net and place it in the clipboard. To paste the copy, use soft key

[PASTE].

PASTE Inserts the net placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY] at the cursor position.

Pressing soft key [PASTE] when a net is selected with [SELECT] causes the selected net to

be replaced by the one placed in the clipboard with [CUT] or [COPY].

CHANGE ADRS Displays the address conversion soft keys to use the address conversion function.

ADRS MAP Calls the ADDRESS MAP screen to check the reference of the used addresses.

UPDATE Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far in the currently executed ladder

program. When the changes are reflected normally, the edited version of the ladder program

will be executed immediately.

RESTRE Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to

the state in which it was when the system switched to the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR

screen or to the state in which it was when [UPDATE] was last used. After having performed

a wrong edit operation, you can use this key if recovery is difficult to accomplish.

SCREEN SETING Calls the setup screen of the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. You can change

various types of settings related to ladder diagram edit operations.

START/STOP Controls the execution of the ladder program. Soft key [RUN] starts the execution of the

ladder program, and soft key [STOP] stops its execution.

CANCEL EDIT Cancels the results of the edit operations performed so far and returns the ladder program to

the state in which it was when the system switched to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR

screen or when [UPDATE] was last used. Displays the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR

screen.

EXIT EDIT Reflects the results of the edit operations performed so far and terminates editing.You cannot move to another screen during edit operation of a ladder diagram by pressing

any function key such as the SYSTEM key unless you terminate editing.




[Create/add a new net](1) Switch to PMC LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR. (See Subsection 8.2.1.)

Position the cursor on SUB72. Alternatively, position the cursor on the net immediately below the

position at which you want to add a new net. Press soft key [CREATE].

→

The PMC LADDER NET EDITOR screen is displayed.

(2) Create a ladder program using the variety of instructions displayed as soft keys.

To set an address, press the <alphabetic letter input> key on the operator's panel; this causes

alphabetic letters to be displayed as soft keys, enabling you to enter alphabetic letters using these

soft keys.

For the operator's panel with the full keyboard: Use the alphabetic keys on the operator's panel to

enter alphabetic letters.

- 55 -




Menu on the NET EDITOR screen

Instruction Function

Reads the signal state of a specified address.

Reads the signal state of a specified address and inverts it.

Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address.Inverts the state of a logic operation result and writes it to a specified address.

FUNC Selects a functional instruction.

Connects one step to another.

Deletes a basic or functional instruction.

Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Left side of an instruction)

Connects or disconnects instructions entered in parallel. (Right side of an instruction)

AUTO Executes the function which automatically enters unused addresses or parameter

numbers.

Writes the state of a logic operation result to a specified address to keep it.

Resets a kept output.

TABLE Displayed if the cursor is positioned on the functional instruction COD (SUB7) or CODB

(SUB27). It is used to change the contents of the data table of these functional

instructions.

RESTRE Returns the currently edited net to the state in which it was when editing started.

NEXT NET Terminates the editing of the current net and allows you to edit the next net.

When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [ZOOM] on the LADDER

DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates changing the current net and enables

the next net to be edited.

When you have called the NET EDITOR screen using soft key [CREATE NET] on the

LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen, the system terminates creating the current net,

inserts the created net, and immediately enters the status in which a new net is created

(empty net status).

INSLIN Inserts a blank line at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram located below the

cursor position will be shifted downward by one line. If a blank line is inserted in the

middle of a functional instruction, the functional instruction will be expanded vertically,

expanding the space between input conditions.

INSCLM Inserts a blank column at the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the right of the

cursor position moves right one column.

APPCLM Inserts a blank column at the right of the current cursor position. The ladder diagram at the

right of the cursor position moves right one column and the ladder diagram is extended

horizontally if necessary.

CANCEL EDIT Returns the net currently being edited to the state at the start of the editing and displays

the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.

EXIT Analyzes the net being edited and stores it in the ladder program. If any error is found in

the net, the NET EDITOR screen remains displayed and an error message is displayed.

- 56 -




(3) To enter a functional instruction, first press soft key [FUNC].

Then, position the cursor on the functional instruction you want to enter and press soft key

[SELECT]. This causes the functional instruction to be inserted into the NET EDITOR screen,

allowing you to specify various parameters (timer No. and time in the case of SUB24 fixed timer).

→

(4) Ladder programs such as those shown below cannot be created.

×

→

The output coil has conditional branching.

- 57 -




[Modify the ladder program](1) Delete an entered instruction:

Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key .

To delete an instruction entered in parallel, follow the procedure below.

Position the cursor on the instruction you want to delete, and press soft key .

Then, press soft key .

→

- 58 -




• To delete a functional instruction, follow the procedure below.

Position the cursor on the desired functional instruction No.

Press soft key .

This causes the functional instruction to be deleted, separating nets. Use soft key to connect

the nets.

→

• To delete a net, follow the procedure below.

Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

Position the cursor on the net you want to delete, and press soft key [DELETE].

- 59 -




(2) Add an instruction:

Call the NET EDITOR screen. Position the cursor on the location where you want to add an

instruction. Press soft key or to add an instruction, then set an address.

If required, before adding a functional instruction, use soft key to delete the net from the

location at which the instruction is to be added, reserving the space for the functional instruction.

- 60 -




• To add a functional instruction between instructions or between nets, follow the procedure

below.

Press the rightmost soft key. This changes the soft key menu.

To add an instruction between nets or between instructions entered in parallel:

Move the cursor below the position at which you want to add an instruction, then presssoft key [INSLIN].

To add an instruction between instructions entered in series:

Move the cursor to the right or left of the position at which an instruction is to be added.

To insert an instruction to the right of the cursor position, press soft key [APPCLM]; to

insert it to the left of the cursor position, press soft key [INSCLM].

Add an instruction to the created space.

- 61 -




(3) Copy or move a net.

Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen. Position the

cursor on the net you want to copy. Press soft key [SELECT]. Use the cursor or other keys to

specify the copy area. After specifying the area, press soft key [COPY]. Move the cursor to the

position at which you want to copy the net, and press soft key [PASTE].

(4) Switch the display format:

Exit the NET EDITOR screen and call the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

Press the rightmost soft key, and the soft key menu will change. Press soft key [+]. This allows you

to change the various settings for ladder diagram display.

- 62 -




- 63 -

Item Description

ADDRESS NOTATION Used to specify whether to display addresses in the ladder diagram as symbols or

addresses. Those addresses for which no symbols have been defined will always be

displayed as addresses.

FUNCTION STYLE Used to switch the functional instruction display format.

COMPACT: Reduces the functional instruction display area to a minimum. The

address parameter monitor is not displayed.

WIDE: Reserves a wide area for displaying the current address parameter value

monitor.

TALL: Reserves a tall area for displaying the current address parameter value

monitor.

SHOW COMMENT OF

CONTACT

Used to switch the format in which comments are to be displayed below contacts.

NONE: Displays no comments. This allows more contacts to be displayed on the

screen.

1 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 1-line format.

2 LINE: Displays comments below contacts in a 7-single-byte-character x 2-line format.

SHOW COMMENT OF

COIL

Used to specify whether to display comments at coil positions.

YES: Displays comments on the right of the ladder diagram.

NO: Displays no comments. This allows more relays to be displayed horizontally.

Comments can be displayed.

SHOW CURSOR Used to specify whether to display the cursor.

YES: Displays the cursor. The cursor movement keys are sued to move the cursor.

For a search, the cursor will move to a found object such as a relay.

NO: Does not display the cursor. The up and down cursor movement keys are used

to directly move the screen display position.

SUBPROGRAM NET

NUMBER

Used to select a method of assigning numbers to the nets to be displayed.

LOCAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of the subprogram currently opened. The net

number display is the display range/number of nets in the entire subprogram

currently opened.

GLOBAL: Assigns 1 to the first net of all ladder programs (second PMC). The netnumber display is the display range/subprogram range.

WRAP SEARCH

ENABLED

Used to specify whether to continue the search starting at the beginning of the ladder

program when the end of the ladder program is reached in a search process.

YES: If the end of the ladder program is reached in a forward search, continues the

search at the beginning. If the beginning is reached in a backward search,

continues the search at the end.

NO: At the point when the end or beginning of the ladder program is reached,

assumes the search to be a failure if no match is found, displaying an error

message.

PROGRAM LIST

ORDER

Used to specify whether to display the subprograms on the PROGRAM LIST EDITOR

screen in the order of program numbers or symbols.

FRAME NET ONSUBPROGRAM

DISPLAY

Used to specify whether to display functional instructions END1, END2, SP, and SPEwhen the contents of a program are displayed using the [ZOOM] key on the

PROGRAM LIST MONITOR/EDITOR screen.

HEAVY LINES IN

LADDER DIAGRAM

Used to specify the thickness of the lines in the ladder diagram.

YES: Uses heavy lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little larger.

NO: Uses light lines in the ladder diagram. The shape of each relay is a little smaller.

ON/OFF CHANGE OF

RELAY SHAPE

Used to specify whether to change the shape of each relay according to its status.

YES: Changes the shape of each relay according to its status. This setting is valid

only when "HEAVY LINES IN LADDER DIAGRAM" is set to "YES".

NO: Does not change the shape of each relay.

ADDRESS COLOR Used to set the color of symbols and addresses.

DIAGRAM COLOR Used to set the color of the ladder diagram.

ACTIVE RELAY COLOR Used to set the color of a relay when it is ON.

PARAMETER COLOR Used to set the color of functional instruction parameters in the monitor display section.

COMMENT COLOR Used to set the color of comments.




Pressing soft key [INIT] causes all settings to be changed to their defaults. After changing settings,

press soft key [EXIT] to return to the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR or NET EDITOR screen.

(5) Search for an instruction:

Press soft key [SEARCH]. This changes the soft key menu.

Item Description

TOPBTM Causes a jump to the beginning of the ladder program. If the beginning is already displayed,

causes a jump to the end.

SEARCH Searches for the address or net number corresponding to an entered character string, displaying

it if it is found. If a number is entered, the system interprets it as a net number.

If a character string other than a number is entered, the system examines to see if the character

string has been defined as a symbol. If it has been defined as a symbol, the system searches for

the address represented by that symbol. If it has not been defined as a symbol, the system

interprets it as a character string representing an address. If succeeding in interpreting it

correctly, the system searches for the address.

W-SRCH Searches for the write coil in which the entered character string is used.

F-SRCH Accepts a functional instruction No. or functional instruction name as input and searches for the

functional instruction.

PREV Repeats the last successful search operation in the backward direction.

NEXT Repeats the last successful search operation in the forward direction.

GLOBAL Switches the search target between all ladder programs (second PMC) and the subprogram

currently opened. The current search target is displayed at the rightmost position.

The system ladder programs (LV1, LV2, P1-P1499) are protected, so that the system ladder

programs cannot be search targets even if "GLOBAL" is selected.

Pressing soft key [EXIT] causes the search menu to be exited.

- 64 -




8.3 EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES

CAUTION

English messages are set in this section because the multi-language displayfunction is used for ladder messages.

Press the emergency stop button.

Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].

Press the rightmost soft key [+]. (Press this soft key several times in some cases.)

Press soft key [MESAGE].

Press soft key [(OPRT)].

Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state).

The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES].

(The ladder program stops.)

- 65 -




The MESSAGE DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.

Use soft key [SEARCH], <page> keys and the <cursor> keys appropriately to search for the address to

which a message is to be entered.

- 66 -




Position the cursor on the target address and press soft key [ZOOM].

Position the cursor on the number setting field and enter the alarm or message number. Move the cursor

to the message setting field, enter the message, and press soft key [EXIT ZOOM].

After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT].

The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed.

Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)

- 67 -




8.4 EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS


Press soft key [PMC CONFIG].


Press soft key [SYMBOL].

Press oft key [(OPRT)].

Press soft key [EDIT] (soft key [EDIT] is displayed only in the emergency stop state.)

The message "DO YOU WANT TO STOP THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed. Press soft key [YES].

(The ladder program stops.)

- 68 -




The SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA EDITOR screen is displayed.

If you want to change a symbol or comment at an address, use soft key [SEARCH].

If you want to add a new symbol or comment, use soft key [NEW ENTRY].

Move the cursor to move the yellow cursor from the symbol field to the program field. Set required data

in each field.

After the termination of editing, press soft key [EXIT EDIT].

The message "DO YOU WANT TO RUN THIS PMC PROGRAM?" is displayed.

Press soft key [YES]. (The ladder program starts.)

- 69 -




- 70 -

8.5 ENDING AN EDITING SESSION

Edited ladder programs and other data are lost if you just turn the power off. After editing, write the data

to the flash ROM. Use the following procedure:


Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].

Press soft key [I/O].

The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.

Select the following items and press soft key [(OPRT)]:

PMC = “PMC2”

DEVICE = “FLASH ROM”

FUNCTION = “WRITE”

KIND OF DATA = “SEQUENCE PROGRAM”

Press soft key [EXEC]. Writing edited data to the flash ROM starts.

"COMPLETE" is displayed to indicate completion.



B-85314EN-1/01 9.CONFIRMATION

9 CONFIRMATION

9.1 DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS

You can display the ladder program status screen. Use the following procedure:

Press soft key [PMC LADDER].

↓

Press the soft key [(OPRT)].

↓

Press the soft key [SWITCH PMC] to switch to the second PMC. (Press this soft key several times if

necessary.)

↓

Check that "2ND PMC" is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.

- 71 -



9.CONFIRMATION B-85314EN-1/01

Move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key [ZOOM].

If the second PMC is already selected, move the cursor to "CUSTOM" (P1500) then press the soft key

[LADDER] or press [(OPRT)] then [ZOOM]. The ladder diagram screen is displayed.

↓

Soft key Function

LIST Lists ladder programs.

SEARCH MENU Displays the search menu in the soft key area.

SWITCH Switches to the select monitor screen.

SWITCH PMC Switches to the first PMC, second PMC, and dual check.

SCREEN

SETING

Calls the setup screen of the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen.

The settings are the same as those on the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR screen.

- 72 -



B-85314EN-1/01 9.CONFIRMATION

- 73 -

9.2 SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS

You can display the logic status of each signal. Use the following procedure:

Press soft key [PMC MAINTE].


Press soft key [SIGNAL STATUS].

The SIGNAL STATUS screen is displayed.

"1" is displayed when the corresponding signal is ON. "0" is displayed when it is OFF.Enter the address or symbol you want to reference and press soft keys [(OPRT)] → [SEARCH], and

information for that address is displayed.

CAUTIONWith this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area.If the second PMC is not selected, the signal status screen, when displayed,does not display symbols set with the custom PMC. So, check that "2ND PMC"is indicated in the upper-left corner of the screen.



10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS B-85314EN-1/01

10 SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

CAUTIONWith this series, the second PMC is the custom PMC use area. However, thePMC parameters are common to the first PMC and second PMC. So, do not useaddresses other than the usable ones.

To set the parameters for timers, counters, keep relays, and data tables, use the following procedure:

(Switch the operation mode to MDI mode.)

Press

↓

Press or →

(The CNC SETTING screen is displayed.)

↓

Press soft key [SETTING].

↓

Set "PARAMETER WRITE" to “1:ENABLE”.

↓

Press or →

(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.)

↓

- 74 -



B-85314EN-1/01 10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].

↓

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again until the following soft keys are displayed.

↓

For timers: Press soft key [TIMER].

Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the setting time.

- 75 -



10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS B-85314EN-1/01

For counters: Press soft key [COUNTR].

Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the value.

For keep relays: Press soft key [KEEP RELAY].

Use the cursor and page keys to move the cursor, and enter the values.

- 76 -



B-85314EN-1/01 10.SETTING PMC PARAMETERS

- 77 -

For data tables: Press soft key [DATA].

The DATA TABLE CONTROL screen is displayed.To change the data type, position the cursor on the TYPE field and change the setting.

Press soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [ZOOM].

Use the cursor and page keys and soft key [SEARCH] to move the cursor, and enter the value.



11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA B-85314EN-1/01

11 INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

11.1 OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN

Connect either a memory card or Handy File (RS-232C).

Press or →

(The CNC SYSTEM screen is displayed.)

↓

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times, then soft key [PMC MAINTE].

↓

Press the rightmost soft key [+] several times again and press soft key [I/O].

↓

The PMC I/O DATA screen is displayed.

- 78 -



B-85314EN-1/01 11.INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA

Input operation (from an external device to the ROBODRILL)(1) Place the machine in the MDI mode and press the emergency stop button to place the machine in the

emergency stop state.

(2) On the I/O DATA screen, move the item and data selection cursors and make the following settings:

Setting item Data

PMC PMC2

DEVICE MEMORY CARD / FLOPPY

FUNCTION READ

KIND OF DATA ―――(Cannot be specified.)

The type of read data is automatically determined

FILE NAME Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the file name

with up to three characters for the extension).

Pressing [(OPRT)] → [LIST] displays a list of files on the memory card. Position

the cursor on the file you want to read and press the [SELECT] key to select the

file.

(3) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Reading the file starts.

When an attempt is made to read a file, the following message is displayed, asking whether to read

the file:READING MESSAGE DATA (SEQUENCE PROGRAM) (PMC2)

<CAUTION>Special care must be exercised to read a sequence program or PMC parameters.

* Reading an inappropriate file may cause unexpected operation of the machine.

* When a sequence program is read during operation, the program automatically stops.

Do you want to read this file?

To continue with the operation, press the [EXEC] key.

(The ladder program being executed automatically stops.)

(4) After the completion of reading in step <3>, write each type of data to the flash ROM. Make the

following settings:

Setting item Data

PMC PMC2

DEVICE FLASH ROM

FUNCTION WRITE

KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data)

MESSAGES (for message data)

FILE NAME ―――(Not set)

(5) Press the [(OPRT)] key → [EXEC] key to execute data writing. "COMPLETE" is displayed to

indicate completion.

WARNINGWhen data is read during the execution of a ladder program, the ladder programautomatically stops. Special care must be exercised to stop a ladder program.If a ladder program is stopped at an inappropriate timing or in an inappropriatemachine state, the machine may perform unexpected operation. In the ladderprogram stopped state, the safety mechanism and monitoring functions of theladder program also stop. Be sure to confirm that "the machine is in anappropriate state" and that "no one is near the machine" before stopping theladder program.

- 79 -




On the PMC I/O DATA screen, pressing soft keys [(OPRT)] → [PORT SETTING] displays the

communication setting screen.

Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device)(1) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to an external device)

Setting item Data

PMC PMC2

DEVICE MEMORY CARD/FLOPPYFUNCTION WRITE

KIND OF DATA SEQUENCE PROGRAM (for ladder data)

MESSAGES (for message data)

FILE NAME Specify a file name in the MS-DOS format (up to eight characters for the

file name with up to three characters for the extension).

Pressing [(OPRT)] → [NEW FILE] specifies:

PMC2_LAD.000 (for ladder data)

PMC2_MSG.000 (for message data)

(2) Press the [(OPRT)] key, then the [EXEC] key. Outputting a message file starts, with the specified

file name.

CAUTIONNo message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, nomessage file can be output.

- 80 -




11.2 OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN

(1) Turn the power OFF.

(2) Insert a memory card into the memory card insertion slot located on the left side of the LCD. (Make

sure that the label on the memory card is facing to the right, and push it in until it snaps into place.)

(3) Press and hold down the soft keys shown in the figure below, and turn on the power ON.

(Keep holding down the keys until the screen shown under (4) is displayed.)

[Turn power ON while holding them down]

(4) The boot screen is displayed.

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60W4 - 05

1.END2.USER DATA LOADING

3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING

4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK

5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE

6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE

7.SRAM DATA UTILITY

8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

*** MESSAGE ***

SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[SELECT][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) Input operation (from a memory card to the ROBODRILL)

(a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "2.USER DATA

LOADING" and press the [SELECT] key.

SYSTEM DATA LOADING

MEMORY CARD DIRECTORY (FREE[KB]: 5123)

1 PMC2.MEM 131200 2011-09-26 08:56

2 PMC2_MSG.MEM 131200 2011-09-26 08:58

3 END

*** MESSAGE ***



(b) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press

[SELECT]:

Example:

"PMC2.MEM" (for ladder data)

"PMC2_MSG.MEM" (for message data)(c) When a file is selected, the message "LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO" is displayed,

asking whether to read the file. Press [YES].

- 81 -




(d) When reading terminates normally, the message "LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT

KEY." is displayed. Press the [SELECT] key.

(e) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to select "END" and press the [SELECT] key. You exit the

SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.

(6) Output operation (from the ROBODRILL to a memory card)

(a) On the main menu, use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to move the cursor to "6.SYSTEM DATA

SAVE" and press the [SELECT] key.

(b) On the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen, press the rightmost soft key [>] and display the page

containing either of the following items:

"PMC2" (for ladder data)

"M2PMCMSG" (for message data)

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

FROM DIRECTORY

1 NC BAS-1(0008)

2 NC BAS-2(0008)

3 NC BAS-3(0008)

4 NC BAS-4(0008)

5 DGD0SRVO(0003)

6 PS0B (0006)

7 PMC1 (0003)

8 END

*** MESSAGE ***

SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.


(c) Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on either of the following files and press[SELECT]:

"PMC2" (for ladder data)

"M2PMCMSG" (for message data)

(d) The confirmation message "SYSTEM DATA SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed.

Press [YES]. Outputting the message file starts.

(e) When the output to the memory card terminates normally, the following message is displayed.

Press the [SELECT] key.

"FILE SAVE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY."

"SAVE FILE NAME : PMC2.000" (for ladder data)

"SAVE FILE NAME : M2PMCMSG.000" (for messages)

When the memory card contains a file with the same name, the number of the extension is

incremented by one. (***.001 - ***.002)(f) Position the cursor on "END" and press the [SELECT] key to exit the SYSTEM DATA SAVE

screen.

- 82 -




- 83 -

(7) Existing the boot screen

Use the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to position the cursor on "1.END" and press the [SELECT] key.

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 60W4 - 05

1.END2.USER DATA LOADING

3.SYSTEM DATA LOADING

4.SYSTEM DATA CHECK

5.SYSTEM DATA DELETE

6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE

7.SRAM DATA UTILITY

8.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

*** MESSAGE ***



The confirmation message "ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO." is displayed. Press the [YES]

key. This causes you to exit the boot screen, displaying the CNC or QUICK screen.

CAUTIONNo message data is set at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore,M2PMCMSG cannot be output.



B-85314EN-1/01

12. INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

- 84 -

12 INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEMAND CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS

[System ladder Custom ladder]

Address Symbol Function Note

R 1300.0 SI0_0 Always ON. 12.1

R 1300.1 SI0_1 Always OFF. 12.1

R 1300.2 SI0_2 ON in a single scanning cycle at the start of

operation.

12.1

R 1300.3 SI0_3 1.0-second clock pulse 12.1



R 1300.6 SI0_6 (Not used)










R 1302.0 SI2_0 Selected program No. 2∧0 12.2













R 1303.5 SI3_5 Selected program No. 2

∧

13 12.2R 1303.6 SI3_6 Selected program No. 2∧14 12.2


R 1304.0 SI4_0 Tool No. 2∧0 12.2

R 1304.1 SI4_1 Tool No. 2∧1 12.2

R 1304.2 SI4_2 Tool No. 2∧2 12.2

R 1304.3 SI4_3 Tool No. 2∧3 12.2

R 1304.4 SI4_4 Tool No. 2∧4 12.2

R 1304.5 SI4_5 Tool No. 2∧5 12.2

R 1304.6 SI4_6 Tool No. 2∧6 12.2

R 1304.7 SI4_7 Tool No. 2∧7 12.2



B-85314EN-1/01


- 85 -



R 1305.0 SI5_0 /M code BCD 2∧0*1 12.6

R 1305.1 SI5_1 M80 output/M code BCD 2∧1*1 12.7/12.6







R 1306.0 SI6_0 M87 output/data read request 12.7/12.6

R 1306.1 SI6_1 M88 output/distribution completion 12.7/12.6

R 1306.2 SI6_2 M89 output/BCD data parity check 12.7/12.6

R 1306.3 SI6_3

R 1306.4 SI6_4 /M code BCD 2∧0*100 12.6

R 1306.5 SI6_5 /M code BCD 2∧1*100 12.6

R 1306.6 SI6_6 /M code BCD 2∧2*100 12.6R 1306.7 SI6_7 /M code BCD 2∧3*100 12.6

R 1307.0 SI7_0 Machine status output 1 (END1 output) 12.16



R 1307.3 SI7_3 Cycle start (in progress) 12.2

R 1307.4 SI7_4 Condition of feed hold 12.2

R 1307.5 SI7_5 Condition of alarm 12.2

R 1307.6 SI7_6 Condition of reset 12.2

R 1307.7 SI7_7 Condition of emergency stop 12.2

R 1308.0 SI8_0 MEM mode selection 12.14R 1308.1 SI8_1 MDI mode selection 12.14

R 1308.2 SI8_2 Handle mode selection 12.14

R 1308.3 SI8_3 Jog mode selection 12.14

R 1308.4 SI8_4 Reference mode selection 12.14

R 1308.5 SI8_5 Edit mode selection 12.14

R 1308.6 SI8_6 Program stoppage 12.2

R 1308.7 SI8_7 Production completion 12.15

R 1309.0 SI9_0 End of selection 12.5

R 1309.1 SI9_1 (Reserved)

R 1309.2 SI9_2 Battery alarm 12.2

R 1309.3 SI9_3 End of program 12.18

R 1309.4 SI9_4 Machine interior coolant output ON 12.17

R 1309.5 SI9_5 Splash guard door closed state 12.19

R 1309.6 SI9_6 Automatic side door closed state 12.20

R 1309.7 SI9_7 Automatic side door open state 12.20



B-85314EN-1/01


- 86 -



R 1310.0 SI10_0 Door open (M60) 12.3

R 1310.1 SI10_1 Automatic door closed state 12.3

R 1310.2 SI10_2 Automatic door open state 12.3

R 1310.3 SI10_3 Warning level detection 12.21

R 1310.4 SI10_4 Breakage level detection 12.21

R 1310.5 SI10_5 Spindle stop 12.22

R 1310.6 SI10_6 Auto mode 12.2

R 1310.7 SI10_7 Tool life end (tool group) 12.11

R 1311.0 SI11_0 Coolant output ON 12.17

R 1311.1 SI11_1 Automatic door open request output 12.3

R 1311.2 SI11_2 Automatic door close request output 12.3

R 1311.3 SI11_3 Air blow output 12.17

R 1311.4 SI11_4 Production completion 1 12.15

R 1311.5 SI11_5 Production completion 2 12.15

R 1311.6 SI11_6 Advance notice of tool life 12.11R 1311.7 SI11_7 Center through coolant output ON 12.17

R 1312.0 SI12_0 Display in Japanese 12.23

R 1312.1 SI12_1 Display in German 12.23

R 1312.2 SI12_2 Display in French 12.23


R 1312.4 SI12_4 Display in Italian 12.23

R 1312.5 SI12_5 Display in Korean 12.23

R 1312.6 SI12_6 Display in Spanish 12.23

R 1312.7 SI12_7 Display in English 12.23

R 1313.0 SI13_0 Position switch 1 12.24R 1313.1 SI13_1 Position switch 2 12.24

R 1313.2 SI13_2 Position switch 3 12.24






R 1314.0 SI14_0 Movement along the X-axis 12.25

R 1314.1 SI14_1 Movement along the Y-axis 12.25

R 1314.2 SI14_2 Movement along the Z-axis 12.25

R 1314.3 SI14_3 Movement along the 4-th axis 12.25

R 1314.4 SI14_4 Movement along the 5-th axis 12.25

R 1314.5 SI14_5 Low air pressure 12.2

R 1314.6 SI14_6

R 1314.7 SI14_7 Emergency stop button 12.2



B-85314EN-1/01


- 87 -



R 1315.0 SI15_0 Completion of X-axis reference position return 12.25

R 1315.1 SI15_1 Completion of Y-axis reference position return 12.25

R 1315.2 SI15_2 Completion of Z-axis reference position return 12.25

R 1315.3 SI15_3 Completion of 4th-axis reference position return 12.25

R 1315.4 SI15_4 Completion of 5th-axis reference position return 12.25

R 1315.5 SI15_5 Completion of machining 12.18

R 1315.6 SI15_6 Feedrate override 100% 12.2

R 1315.7 SI15_7 Spindle speed override 100% 12.2







R 1316.6 SI16_6 (Reserved)R 1316.7 SI16_7 (Reserved)

R 1317.0 SI17_0 Door open (M61) 12.3

R 1317.1 SI17_1 Door open (M62) 12.3

R 1317.2 SI17_2 Door open (M63) 12.3

R 1317.3 SI17_3 Door open (M64) 12.3

R 1317.4 SI17_4 Door open (M65) 12.3

R 1317.5 SI17_5 Alarm output 2 12.10

R 1317.6 SI17_6 Operation-enabled state 12.2

R 1317.7 SI17_7 (Not used)

R 1318.0 SI18_0 Establishment of X-axis reference position 12.25R 1318.1 SI18_1 Establishment of Y-axis reference position 12.25

R 1318.2 SI18_2 Establishment of Z-axis reference position 12.25

R 1318.3 SI18_3 Establishment of 4th-axis reference position 12.25

R 1318.4 SI18_4 Establishment of 5th-axis reference position 12.25

R 1318.5 SI18_5 Tool group reset request reception 12.11

R 1318.6 SI18_6 Tool group reset error 12.11

R 1318.7 SI18_7

R 1319.0 SI19_0 Completion of X-axis reference position return (When ZPX is ON at the

completion of G27 or G28)

R 1319.1 SI19_1 Completion of Y-axis reference position return (When ZPY is ON at the


R 1319.2 SI19_2 Completion of Z-axis reference position return (When ZPZ is ON at the


R 1319.3 SI19_3 Completion of 4th-axis reference position return (When ZP4 is ON at the completion

of G27 or G28)

R 1319.4 SI19_4 Completion of 5th-axis reference position return (When ZP5 is ON at the completion

of G27 or G28)

R 1319.5 SI19_5

R 1319.6 SI19_6

R 1319.7 SI19_7



B-85314EN-1/01


- 88 -



R 1320.0 SI20_0 S command 2^0 12.22

R 1320.1 SI20_1 S command 2^1 12.22

R 1320.2 SI20_2 S command 2^2 12.22

R 1320.3 SI20_3 S command 2^3 12.22

R 1320.4 SI20_4 S command 2^4 12.22

R 1320.5 SI20_5 S command 2^5 12.22

R 1320.6 SI20_6 S command 2^6 12.22

R 1320.7 SI20_7 S command 2^7 12.22

R 1321.0 SI21_0 S command 2^8 12.22

R 1321.1 SI21_1 S command 2^9 12.22

R 1321.2 SI21_2 S command 2^10 12.22

R 1321.3 SI21_3 S command 2^11 12.22

R 1321.4 SI21_4 S command 2^12 12.22

R 1321.5 SI21_5 S command 2^13 12.22

R 1321.6 SI21_6 S command 2^14 12.22R 1321.7 SI21_7 S command 2^15 12.22

R 1322.0 SI22_0 S command 2^16 12.22

R 1322.1 SI22_1 S command 2^17 12.22

R 1322.2 SI22_2 S command 2^18 12.22

R 1322.3 SI22_3 S command 2^19 12.22

R 1322.4 SI22_4 S command 2^20 12.22

R 1322.5 SI22_5 S command 2^21 12.22

R 1322.6 SI22_6 S command 2^22 12.22

R 1322.7 SI22_7 S command 2^23 12.22

R 1323.0 SI23_0 S command 2^24 12.22R 1323.1 SI23_1 S command 2^25 12.22

R 1323.2 SI23_2 S command 2^26 12.22

R 1323.3 SI23_3 S command 2^27 12.22

R 1323.4 SI23_4 S command 2^28 12.22

R 1323.5 SI23_5 S command 2^29 12.22

R 1323.6 SI23_6 S command 2^30 12.22

R 1323.7 SI23_7 S command 2^31 12.22

R 1324.0 SI24_0 M03 command 12.22

R 1324.1 SI24_1 M05 command 12.22

R 1324.2 SI24_2 Spindle rotation button ON 12.22

R 1324.3 SI24_3 Center through coolant pump on 12.17

R 1324.4 SI24_4 Center through coolant on 12.17

R 1324.5 SI24_5 Air purge on 12.17

R 1324.6 SI24_6 Automatic fire extinguishing device error ON when the automatic fire

extinguishing device is faulty or the

power is off. (Option)

R 1324.7 SI24_7 Start of the automatic fire extinguishing device ON when the automatic fire

extinguishing device starts.

(Option)



B-85314EN-1/01


- 89 -



R 1325.0 SI25_0 Input signal for custom macro (#1100) 12.26














R 1326.6 SI26_6 Input signal for custom macro (#1114) 12.26R 1326.7 SI26_7 Input signal for custom macro (#1115) 12.26









R 1328.0 SI28_0 Input signal for custom macro (#1133) 12.26R 1328.1 SI28_1 Input signal for custom macro (#1133) 12.26

















B-85314EN-1/01


- 90 -











R 1331.0 SI31_0 Clamp request (5th axis) 12.12

R 1331.1 SI31_1 Unclamp request (5th axis) 12.12

R 1331.2 SI31_2 Clamped (5th axis) 12.12

R 1331.3 SI31_3 Clamp request (4th axis) 12.12

R 1331.4 SI31_4 Unclamp request (4th axis) 12.12

R 1331.5 SI31_5 Clamped (4th axis) 12.12

R 1331.6 SI31_6R 1331.7 SI31_7

R 1332.0 SI32_0 Selected tool group No. 2^0 12.11








R 1333.0 SI33_0 Tool life of group 1 12.11R 1333.1 SI33_1 Tool life of group 2 12.11

R 1333.2 SI33_2 Tool life of group 3 12.11
















B-85314EN-1/01


- 91 -



R 1335.0 SI35_0 Advance notice of tool life of group 1 12.11














R 1336.6 SI36_6 Advance notice of tool life of group 15 12.11R 1336.7 SI36_7 Advance notice of tool life of group 16 12.11

R 1337.0 SI37_0 Display in Chinese (Simplified) 12.23

R 1337.1 SI37_1 Display in Portuguese 12.23

R 1337.2 SI37_2 Display in Russian 12.23






R 1338.0 SI38_0 Tool clamp signal 12.2R 1338.1 SI38_1 Tool change signal 12.2

R 1338.2 SI38_2 Turret recovery mode 12.2

R 1338.3 SI38_3 Single block 12.2

R 1338.4 SI38_4 Rapid traverse LOW 12.2

R 1338.5 SI38_5 Rapid traverse 25% 12.2



R 1339.0 SI39_0 Tap return mode 12.2

R 1339.1 SI39_1 Condition of reset ON while the reset button on the

operator's panel is being pressed.

R 1339.2 SI39_2

R 1339.3 SI39_3

R 1339.4 SI39_4

R 1339.5 SI39_5

R 1339.6 SI39_6

R 1339.7 SI39_7



B-85314EN-1/01


- 92 -











































B-85314EN-1/01


- 93 -











































B-85314EN-1/01


- 94 -











































B-85314EN-1/01


- 95 -











































B-85314EN-1/01


- 96 -











































B-85314EN-1/01


- 97 -


























R 1428.0 SI78_0 Robot system being started 12.33R 1428.1 SI78_1 Cycle stop mode 12.33

R 1428.2 SI78_2 System stop mode 12.33

R 1428.3 SI78_3 System start 12.33






R 1429.1 SI79_1 Taper cleaning coolant ON signal When the taper cleaning coolant

valve and pump are ON

R 1429.2 SI79_2 Machining coolant ON signal When the machining coolant valve

and pump are ON

R 1429.3 SI79_3 Teach mode signal 12.33

R 1429.4 SI79_4 Front door open signal 12.33

R 1429.5 SI79_5 Interaction mode signal 12.33

R 1429.6 SI79_6

R 1429.7 SI79_7



B-85314EN-1/01


- 98 -






R 1430.3 SI80_3 Probe signal error ON when a touch probe failure is

detected between M38 and M39.


R 1430.5 SI80_5

R 1430.6 SI80_6

R 1430.7 SI80_7

R 1431.0 SI81_0 When menu operation "1. TOOL CHANGE" is

selected

R 1431.1 SI81_1 When menu operation "2. AXES MOVEMENT" is

selected

R 1431.2 SI81_2 When menu operation "3. SPINDLE REV." is

selectedR 1431.3 SI81_3 When menu operation "4. REF. POINT" is

selected

R 1431.4 SI81_4 When menu operation "5. CANCEL" is selected

R 1431.5 SI81_5 When menu operation "6. EXT. SIGNAL" is

selected

R 1431.6 SI81_6 When menu operation "7. CLAMP" is selected

R 1431.7 SI81_7 When menu operation "8. NC LANGUAGE" is

selected

R 1432.0 SI82_0 Error signal at tool registration/runout

measurement

ON when a failure is detected (tool

runout detection function).

R 1432.1 SI82_1 Excessive tool runout signal ON when there is excessive toolrunout (tool runout detection

function).

R 1432.2 SI82_2

R 1432.3 SI82_3

R 1432.4 SI82_4

R 1432.5 SI82_5

R 1432.6 SI82_6

R 1432.7 SI82_7



B-85314EN-1/01


- 99 -

[CNC Custom ladder]


F 0010.0 M code 2^0 12.27

F 0010.1 M code 2^1 12.27

F 0010.2 M code 2^2 12.27

F 0010.3 M code 2^3 12.27

F 0010.4 M code 2^4 12.27

F 0010.5 M code 2^5 12.27

F 0010.6 M code 2^6 12.27

F 0010.7 M code 2^7 12.27

F 0011.0 M code 2^8 12.27

F 0011.1 M code 2^9 12.27

F 0011.2 M code 2^10 12.27

F 0011.3 M code 2^11 12.27

F 0011.4 M code 2^12 12.27

F 0011.5 M code 2^13 12.27

F 0011.6 M code 2^14 12.27F 0011.7 M code 2^15 12.27

F 0012.0 M code 2^16 12.27

F 0012.1 M code 2^17 12.27

F 0012.2 M code 2^18 12.27

F 0012.3 M code 2^19 12.27

F 0012.4 M code 2^20 12.27

F 0012.5 M code 2^21 12.27

F 0012.6 M code 2^22 12.27

F 0012.7 M code 2^23 12.27

F 0013.0 M code 2^24 12.27F 0013.1 M code 2^25 12.27

F 0013.2 M code 2^26 12.27

F 0013.3 M code 2^27 12.27

F 0013.4 M code 2^28 12.27

F 0013.5 M code 2^29 12.27

F 0013.6 M code 2^30 12.27

F 0013.7 M code 2^31 12.27



B-85314EN-1/01


- 100 -

[Custom ladder System ladder]


R 1350.0 SO0_0 Workpiece No./program No. search 2^0*1 12.4/12.5




R 1350.4 SO0_4 /Program No. search 2^0*10 12.5










R 1351.6 SO1_6 /Program No. search 2^2*1000 12.5R 1351.7 SO1_7 /Program No. search 2^3*1000 12.5

R 1352.0 SO2_0 Data read request 12.5

R 1352.1 SO2_1 External start 12.28

R 1352.2 SO2_2 External hold 12.28

R 1352.3 SO2_3 External reset 12.28

R 1352.4 SO2_4 External emergency stop 12.28

R 1352.5 SO2_5 Completion (FIN) 12.6

R 1352.6 SO2_6 Single block mode ON 12.28

R 1352.7 SO2_7 Dry run mode ON 12.28

R 1353.0 SO3_0 Door close request 12.3R 1353.1 SO3_1 External door open control 12.3

R 1353.2 SO3_2 External door close control 12.3

R 1353.3 SO3_3 DNC operation 12.28

R 1353.4 SO3_4 Custom macro interrupt 12.8

R 1353.5 SO3_5 Reset & rewind 12.9

R 1353.6 SO3_6 Automatic side door open request 12.20

R 1353.7 SO3_7 Automatic side door close request 12.20

R 1354.0 SO4_0 Disabling of machine operator's panel start

button

12.13

R 1354.1 SO4_1 X-axis interlock 12.25

R 1354.2 SO4_2 Y-axis interlock 12.25

R 1354.3 SO4_3 Z-axis interlock 12.25

R 1354.4 SO4_4 4-th axis interlock 12.25

R 1354.5 SO4_5 5-th axis interlock 12.25

R 1354.6 SO4_6 Door interlock 12.20

R 1354.7 SO4_7 (Reserved)



B-85314EN-1/01


- 101 -



R 1355.0 SO5_0 Alarm message display in progress 12.29

R 1355.1 SO5_1 Operator message display in progress 12.29

R 1355.2 SO5_2 Machine status output 1 request 12.16



R 1355.5 SO5_5 Disabling of ROBODRILL operator's panel 12.13

R 1355.6 SO5_6 Operator message display in progress 2 12.29

R 1355.7 SO5_7 Lamp check function ON 12.13







R 1356.6 SO6_6 (Reserved)R 1356.7 SO6_7 (Reserved)

R 1357.0 SO7_0 Tool breakage 12.11

R 1357.1 SO7_1 Block skip ON (/, /1) 12.35

R 1357.2 SO7_2 Switching of operation mode (to MEM mode) 12.14

R 1357.3 SO7_3 Switching of operation mode (to MDI mode) 12.14

R 1357.4 SO7_4 Switching of operation mode (to handle mode) 12.14

R 1357.5 SO7_5 Switching of operation mode (to edit mode) 12.14

R 1357.6 SO7_6 Machine interior lamp ON 12.30

R 1357.7 SO7_7 Machine interior cleaning coolant control 12.17

R 1358.0 SO8_0 4-axis clamp (M10) signal output command 12.12R 1358.1 SO8_1 4-axis unclamp (M11) signal output command 12.12

R 1358.2 SO8_2 5-axis clamp (M68) signal output command 12.12

R 1358.3 SO8_3 5-axis unclamp (M69) signal output command 12.12

R 1358.4 SO8_4 Counter 1 (production count) reset 12.15

R 1358.5 SO8_5 Counter 1 (total production count) reset 12.15

R 1358.6 SO8_6 Counter 2 (production count) reset 12.15

R 1358.7 SO8_7 Counter 2 (total production count) reset 12.15

R 1359.0 SO9_0 Counter screen display 12.15

R 1359.1 SO9_1

R 1359.2 SO9_2 Alarm output 2 stoppage 12.10

R 1359.3 SO9_3 Door unlock 12.19

R 1359.4 SO9_4 Tool group reset request 12.11

R 1359.5 SO9_5 Power OFF request 12.31

R 1359.6 SO9_6 No spindle rotating 12.22

R 1359.7 SO9_7 Low air pressure message cancel The message is not displayed

when this signal is ON.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 102 -






R 1360.3 SO10_3

R 1360.4 SO10_4 Clamp check (4th axis) 12.12

R 1360.5 SO10_5 Unclamp check (4th axis) 12.12

R 1360.6 SO10_6 Clamp check (5th axis) 12.12

R 1360.7 SO10_7 Unclamp check (5th axis) 12.12








R 1362.0 SO12_0 Output signal for custom macro (#1000) 12.26








R 1363.0 SO13_0 Output signal for custom macro (#1008) 12.26R 1363.1 SO13_1 Output signal for custom macro (#1009) 12.26







R 1364.0 SO14_0 Tool group No. specification 2^0 12.11










B-85314EN-1/01


- 103 -



R 1365.0 SO15_0 Spindle override 2^0 12.32








R 1366.0 SO16_0 Cutting override 2^0 12.32






R 1366.6 SO16_6 Cutting override 2^6 12.32R 1366.7 SO16_7 Cutting override 2^7 12.32

R 1367.0 SO17_0 Robot teach in progress 12.33

R 1367.1 SO17_1 Interaction/independent operation switch 12.33

R 1367.2 SO17_2 System start 12.33

R 1367.3 SO17_3 Robot operation screen display 12.33

R 1367.4 SO17_4 Cycle stop command 12.33

R 1367.5 SO17_5 System stop command 12.33

R 1367.6 SO17_6 Robot reset 12.33

R 1367.7 SO17_7 Peripheral device ready 12.33

R 1368.0 SO18_0 Automatic side door open 12.33R 1368.1 SO18_1 Automatic side door closed 12.33

R 1368.2 SO18_2 Detection of the center through coolant lower

limit

OFF when the lower limit is

detected.

R 1368.3 SO18_3 Detection of an abnormal center through coolant

pressure (upper limit)

OFF when an abnormal pressure is

detected.

R 1368.4 SO18_4 Detection of clogging of the center through filter OFF when clogging is detected.

R 1368.5 SO18_5 Detection of an abnormal center through coolant

pressure (lower limit)

OFF when an abnormal pressure is

detected.

R 1368.6 SO18_6 Overheating of the center through coolant pump ON when overheating is detected.

R 1368.7 SO18_7 Detection of clogging of the center through

suction filter

OFF when clogging is detected.

R 1369.0 SO19_0 Center through coolant pump on/off command 12.17

R 1369.1 SO19_1 Center through coolant on/off command 12.17

R 1369.2 SO19_2 Air purge on/off command 12.17

R 1369.3 SO19_3 Spindle air blow Air of the spindle blows for ON.




R 1369.7 SO19_7 Start of the lubrication pump Pump is executing for ON.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 104 -





R 1370.2 SO20_2 System being started 12.33


R 1370.4 SO20_4 Automatic power-off disable signal ON when the automatic power-off

function is disabled.

R 1370.5 SO20_5 Rapid traverse LOW selection ON when rapid traverse LOW is

selected. Turn on this signal for

approx. 100 ms.

R 1370.6 SO20_6 Rapid traverse 100% selection ON when rapid traverse 100% is

selected. Turn on this signal for

approx. 100 ms.

R 1370.7 SO20_7








R1372.0 SO22_0 (Reserved)




R1372.4 SO22_4 (Reserved)R1372.5 SO22_5 (Reserved)



R1373.0 SO23_0 Customizing item 1 count signal 12.34








R 1374.0 SO24_0 Optional block skip (/2) 12.35










B-85314EN-1/01


- 105 -

12.1 BASIC SIGNALS


Address Symbol Function

Always ON SI0_0 (R1300.0) Always ON during ladder program operation.

Always OFF SI0_1 (R1300.1) Always OFF during ladder program operation.

ON in a single scanning

cycle at the start of

operation

SI0_2 (R1300.2) ON only during a single scan cycle (4 ms) when the ladder

program starts.

1.0-second clock pulse SI0_3 (R1300.3) Repeats on and off at intervals of about 1 second.

0.1-second clock pulse SI0_4 (R1300.4) Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.1 seconds.

0.5-second clock pulse SI0_5 (R1300.5) Repeats on and off at intervals of about 0.5 seconds.

12.2 MACHINE STATUS



Number of the program

being executed

SI2_0 (R1302.0)-

SI3_7 (R1303.7)

The main program number currently selected on the

ROBODRILL is output as binary data.

Example) When O1000 is selected:

Addresses: R1303 R1302

Bits: 76543210 76543210

Data: 00000011 11101000

Tool number SI4_0 (R1304.0)-

SI4_7 (R1304.7)

The number (magazine number) of the tool currently mounted

on the spindle is output as binary data.

Example) When T14 is mounted:

Address: R1304

Bits: 76543210

Data: 00001110

Cycle start in progress SI7_3 (R1307.3) ON during automatic operation (including MDI operation).

Feed hold status SI7_4 (R1307.4) ON when the stop button lamp on the operator's panel is on

(in the status such as feed hold stop).

Alarm state SI7_5 (R1307.5) ON when an alarm is issued.

Reset in progress SI7_6 (R1307.6) ON in the reset status (such as when the reset key on the

operator's panel is pressed, M30 or M02 is specified, or the

machine is in the emergency stop state).

Emergency stop state SI7_7 (R1307.7) OFF in the emergency stop state.

Program stop state SI8_6 (R1308.6) ON in the automatic operation stop state (when "STOP" is

displayed for the status display on the CNC screen).

Battery alarm state SI9_2 (R1309.2) ON when the voltage of the CNC memory battery is lower

than or equal to the specified value.

Auto mode SI10_6 (R1310.6) ON when the handle, jog, or manual reference position return

mode is not selected.

ON during memory or DNC operation when K06#7 is 1.

Low air pressure SI14_5 (R1314.5) ON when the pressure of air supplied to the ROBODRILL is

lower than the specified value.

Emergency stop button SI14_7 (R1314.7) OFF when the emergency stop button on the operator's panel

is pressed (the hardware emergency stop circuit is turned

OFF).

Feedrate override 100% SI15_6 (R1315.6) ON when the cutting feedrate override switch is placed in the

100% position.

Spindle speed override100%

SI15_7 (R1315.7) ON when the spindle speed override is 100%.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 106 -



Operation enabled state SI17_6 (R1317.6) ON when all of the following conditions are satisfied:

<1> The front door is closed.

<2> Door interlock (SO4.6) is OFF.

<3> Feed hold is not in progress.

<4> The automatic mode is set.

<5> The machine is not in the alarm or emergency stop state.

<6> Reset is not in progress.

Tool clamp signal SI38_0 (R1338.0) ON when the tool is clamped.

Tool change signal SI38_1 (R1338.1) ON when the tool is changed.

Turret recovery mode SI38_2 (R1338.2) ON when the turret is recovered.

Single block SI38_3 (R1338.3) ON when single block is set to ON.

Rapid traverse LOW SI38_4 (R1338.4) ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to LOW.

Rapid traverse 25% SI38_5 (R1338.5) ON when the rapid traverse rate is set to 25%.



Tap return mode SI39_0 (R1339.0) ON during tap return operation (ON while the tap return screen

of the maintenance setting screen is displayed).

12.3 FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL



Door open (M60) SI10_0 (R1310.0)

Door open (M61) SI17_0 (R1317.0)

Door open (M62) SI17_1 (R1317.1)

Door open (M63) SI17_2 (R1317.2)Door open (M64) SI17_3 (R1317.3)

Door open (M65) SI17_4 (R1317.4)

Specifying each M code causes the front automatic door

to open.

Each signal is turned ON when the door opens to the limit

position.

Automatic door closed state SI10_1 (R1310.1) ON when the front automatic door is in the closed limit

position (the close limit proximity switch is ON and the

open limit proximity switch is OFF).

Automatic door open state SI10_2 (R1310.2) ON when the front automatic door is in the open limit

position (the open limit proximity switch is ON and the

close limit proximity switch is OFF).

Automatic door open request

output

SI11_1 (R1311.1) ON when automatic door open is specified.

Automatic door close request

output

SI11_2 (R1311.2) ON when automatic door close is specified.



Door close request SO3_0 (R1353.0) When M60 to M65 is specified, turning this signal ON

causes the front automatic door to close and restarts

operation.

Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the

relevant command.

External door open control SO3_1 (R1353.1) Opens the front automatic door. The door is

automatically unlocked. (Door unlock control is not

needed.)

Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying therelevant command.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 107 -


External door close control SO3_2 (R1353.2) Closes the front automatic door. Operation is not

restarted after the door is closed.


relevant command.

[Front automatic door control using M60 to M65]

Specify M60 to

M65 command

Open automatic

door

Output "door open" signal

Is door close request

signal input?

Close automatic

door

Restart of

operation

Opening and closing the automatic door with an M code

In auto (MEM) or MDI mode, issuing a code M60 to M65 causes the automatic door to open.

When the door is open, inputting the appropriate signal to the machine causes the door to close and

operation to restart.

Door open signal: SI10_0, SI17_0 to SI17_4

Door close request signal: SO3_0

CAUTION

1 The door close request signal (from a custom ladder program to a system ladderprogram) is effective only when an M60 to M65 command is being executed.The signal is ignored if the machine is reset or if an M60 to M65 command is notbeing executed.

2 When an M60 to M65 command is being executed, the operator message "2001THE DOOR OF THE SPLASH GUARD IS OPEN." is not displayed even if thedoor is open.

3 When the robot system standard package option is used, the M60 to M65functions cannot be used.



B-85314EN-1/01


12.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION

This function allows you to store several machining programs in program storage memory in advance, so

that you can call the desired program later by using a means such as a rotary switch.

Selecting the desired program number using a means such as a rotary switch first and then pressing the

cycle start button causes the specified program to be selected, starting automatic operation.

Program numbers O0001 to O0015 can be selected.

To use the external workpiece number search function, display the QUICK screen,

6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT.

WORK No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.



Workpiece No.

search

SO0_0 (R1350.0)

-

SO0_3 (R1350.3)

Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary

data.

[Relationship between the signal states and the program numbers to be selected]

Switch 4

(SO0_3)

Switch 3

(SO0_2)

Switch 2

(SO0_1)

Switch 1

(SO0_0)

Program number to be

selected

0 0 0 0 None selected

0 0 0 1 O0001

0 0 1 0 O00020 0 1 1 O0003

0 1 0 0 O0004

0 1 0 1 O0005

0 1 1 0 O0006

0 1 1 1 O0007

1 0 0 0 O0008

1 0 0 1 O0009

1 0 1 0 O0010

1 0 1 1 O0011

1 1 0 0 O0012

1 1 0 1 O0013

1 1 1 0 O0014

1 1 1 1 O0015

- 108 -



B-85314EN-1/01


CAUTION1 This function is available only in automatic operation (MEM mode). It cannot be

used in MDI operation.2 The effective program numbers are O0001 to O0015.

3 You do not necessarily store in memory the programs corresponding to allnumbers.

4 If the program corresponding to a selected number is not found in memory,alarm message DS0059, "PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND" is issued whenthe function is initiated.

5 When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single blockstop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selection isexecuted; the current program restarts where it was stopped.

6 To restart a program at an intermediate point, perform a sequence numbersearch in automatic operation mode (MEM mode), then initiate the function.Then, no program number selection is executed, but the program restarts where

it was stopped.7 When the function is initiated with all the signals being turned OFF, no program

number selection is executed, but the currently selected program is executed.To execute automatic operation with a program number other than O0001 toO0015, use the steps below:

• Perform a program number search (on the screen).

• Turn all the program selection switch signals to "OFF".

• Press the operation start button.

8 This function cannot be used together with the external program number searchfunction.

9 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the programediting function of the CNC, alarm message DS0059 "PROGRAM NUMBERNOT FOUND" is issued.

- 109 -



B-85314EN-1/01


12.5 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH FUNCTION

This function allows you to supply a single program number from an external device such as a sequencer

to ROBODRILL, so that that program can be called from the memory in the ROBODRILL control unit.

Program numbers O0001 to O9999 can be selected.

The program number to be selected can be specified using a 4-digit BCD code.

To use the external program number search function, display the QUICK screen,

6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "EXT.

PROG. No. SEARCH" for PROGRAM SELECTION.

[Interface](Custom ladder System ladder)

Signal Address Function

Workpiece No.

search

SO0_0(R1350.0)

-

SO0_3(R1350.3)

Specifies the number of a program to be started as binary data.

- 110 -

1 digit in

BCD

A program number is specified as a BCD code.

Those bits that are always 0 need not used.

You can omit them according to the program

numbers used.

10 digits in BCD

100 digits in BCD

Program number

data signal

SO0_0 (R1350.0)

SO0_1 (R1350.1)

SO0_2 (R1350.2)

SO0_3 (R1350.3)

SO0_4 (R1350.4)

SO0_5 (R1350.5)

SO0_6 (R1350.6)

SO0_7 (R1350.7)

SO1_0 (R1351.0)

SO1_1 (R1351.1)SO1_2 (R1351.2)

SO1_3 (R1351.3)

SO1_4 (R1351.4)

SO1_5 (R1351.5)

SO1_6 (R1351.6)

SO1_7 (R1351.7)

1000 digits in BCD

Data read request

signal

SO2_0 (R1352.0) When this signal is output, ROBODRILL reads the program

number specified with the program number data signal.

External start

signal

SO2_1 (R1352.1) After the program number is selected (while an end-of-selection

signal is being output from the custom ladder program),

outputting this signal causes automatic operation to start. This

signal must be a pulse signal of 200 ms or longer.

(Automatic operation starts at the falling edge of the pulse signal.)



B-85314EN-1/01


(System ladder Custom ladder)


End-of-selection

signal

SI9_0 (R1309.0) This signal indicates that program number data reading and

program number selection are completed and the machine is now

ready for an automatic operation start.

When this signal is output, turn the data read request signal OFF.

First confirm that this signal has been output, then start automatic

operation using the external start signal.

This signal is turned OFF in the following cases:

• Operation start

• Reset

• Selection of a new program number

[Timing chart for an external program number search]

Number setting

ON

ON

ON

Number reading Selection

Automaticoperation

Program number data signal

Data read request signal

External start signal

End of selection

ROBODRILL operation

- 111 -



B-85314EN-1/01


CAUTION1 This function cannot be used together with the external workpiece number

search function.2 When the function is initiated in the automatic operation stop status (single

block stop) or automatic operation halt status (feed hold), no program selectionis executed; the current program restarts where it was stopped.

3 If there is no program corresponding to the selected number in memory, analarm (alarm message: DS0059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND) is issuedwhen an attempt is made to read the program number data.

4 If the data for the program number to be selected is 0, alarm message "DS1128DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE " is issued. Before the data read request signal isturned ON, be sure to set a number.

5 You can protect programs with program numbers O8000 to O8999 with theappropriate NC parameter bit setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#0 (NE8))Programs with program numbers O9000 to O9999 are protected with the

appropriate parameter setting. (NC parameter No. 3202#4 (NE9))6 When a selected program is being edited in the background by the program

editing function of the CNC, alarm message DS1130 "SEARCH REQUEST NOT ACCEPTED" is issued.

7 This function cannot be used during an emergency stop or reset.

- 112 -



B-85314EN-1/01


12.6 EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION

This function outputs a specified M code number.

By performing the operation corresponding to the specified M code, an external device can be interlocked

with ROBODRILL.

An M code number is output as a 3-digit BCD code.

To use the external M code BCD output function, display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/

SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE, then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set "ON" for "M CODE

OUTPUT BY BCD".

- 113 -



B-85314EN-1/01


[Interface](System ladder Custom ladder)


1 digit in BCD

A specified M code is output as a BCD code.

Not all data need not necessarily be read.

You can omit reading according to the M codes

used.

10 digits in BCD

M code number

data signal

SI5_0 (R1305.0)

SI5_1 (R1305.1)

SI5_2 (R1305.2)

SI5_3 (R1305.3)

SI5_4 (R1305.4)

SI5_5 (R1305.5)

SI5_6 (R1305.6)

SI5_7 (R1305.7)

SI6_4 (R1306.4)

SI6_5 (R1306.5)

SI6_6 (R1306.6)

SI6_7 (R1306.7)100 digits in BCD

Data read request

signal

SI6_0 (R1306.0) This signal indicates that the M code number data signal is being

output.Read the M code number while this signal is being output.

Distribution

completion signal

SI6_1 (R1306.1) This signal indicates that an auxiliary function (M, S, or T code) is

specified and the movement along each axis is completed. (This signal

is not usually used.)

The result of a parity check is output.

Parity of specified M

codeParity checkCheck

signalK04#5 = 0 K04#5 = 1

0 Odd EvenEven parity

check

K01#1 = 0

1 Even Odd

0 Even OddOdd parity checkK01#1 = 1 1 Odd Even

BCD output data

parity check signal

SI6_2 (R1306.2)

K01#1: Selection between even and odd parity checks

K04#5: Selection between parity check result output states

(Custom ladder System ladder)


Completion signal

(FIN)

S02_5 (R1352.5) After the operation of the external device is completed, input this

signal.

When the signal is input, ROBODRILL ends M code output, proceeding

to the next block of the program. Turn this signal OFF at the end of the

M code output.

- 114 -



B-85314EN-1/01


[Timing chart for external M code BCD output]

ON ON

ON ON

ON ON

M code specification M code specification

M code number data signal

Data read request signal

Completion signal

ROBODRILL operation

CAUTION1 This function cannot be used together with the M code output function.2 Never use the M codes used by FANUC.(From M00 to M199)3 When using multiple M code commands, specify the external M code at the first

M code position.

- 115 -



B-85314EN-1/01


12.7 M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89)

This function outputs the signal corresponding to a specified M code.



M81 output SI5_2 (R1305.2)

M82 output SI5_3 (R1305.3)

A 100-ms pulse signal is output. (Pulse type)

M83 output SI5_4 (R1305.4) ON when M83 is specified or OFF when M84 is specified. (ON1

type)

M84 output SI5_5 (R1305.5)

M80 output SI5_1 (R1305.1)

M85 output SI5_6 (R1305.6)

M86 output SI5_7 (R1305.7)

M87 output SI6_0 (R1306.0)

M88 output SI6_1 (R1306.1)M89 output SI6_2 (R1306.2)

ON when the corresponding M code is specified. (FIN type)

OFF when the completion (FIN) signal (SO2_5) is turned ON.

M81M codespecification

ONSignal output

M83 M84M codespecification

ONSignal output

M81M codespecification

ONSignal output

OperationCompletion

signalExternal device

(FIN type)

(Pulse type) (ON1 type)

If an M code of the pulse or ON1 type is specified, the machine automatically proceeds to the next block

of the program after the output (or stoppage) of the signal.If an M code of the FIN type is specified, the machine waits for the input of an external completion signal,

then proceeds to the next block of the program after the input of the signal.

CAUTIONUsually, M84 (SI5_5) is not output.It is output if all M codes M80 to M89 are set to the FIN type.(Display the QUICK screen, 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, 13.EXT. INTERFACE,then FUNCTION SELECTION, and set FIN TYPE.)In this case, M81 to M83 are also set to the FIN type.

- 116 -



B-85314EN-1/01


- 117 -

12.8 INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION(OPTION)

During the execution of a program, this signal can be turned ON to call another program. For details ofthe interrupt type custom macro function, refer to the CNC operator's manual.



Custom macro interrupt SO3_4 (R1353.4) Starts an interrupt type custom macro.

12.9 RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION



Reset & rewind SO3_5 (R1353.5) When this signal is ON, the ROBODRILL performs thefollowing operations:

• Decelerates and stops the machine along the controlled

axis along which it is moving.

• Enters the reset state.

Cancels the alarms that can be released.

• Rewinds the currently selected main program to its top

(not in the MDI mode).

12.10 ALARM OUTPUT 2

This signal is mainly used to control the buzzer when an alarm is issued.



Alarm output 2 SI17_5(R1317.5) ON when an alarm is issued.

OFF when an alarm is released.

OFF when the alarm output 2 stop signal (SO9_2) is turned ON.

OFF when K06#2 is 1 and the time specified for timer T06 has

elapsed.



Alarm output 2stop

SO9_2 (R1359.2) When alarm output 2 (SI17_5) is ON, turning this signal ON turnsalarm output 2 (SI17_5) OFF.

Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when specifying the relevant

command.



B-85314EN-1/01


12.11 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

(1) Reset of a tool group (counter)

A specified tool group (counter) can be reset.



Tool group (counter)

number

SO14_0 (R1364.0)

⏐

SO14_7 (R1364.7)

The number of the tool group (counter) to be reset is

specified as binary data. (0 to 14)

If 0 is specified, the currently selected tool group is assumed.

Tool group (counter) reset

request

SO9_4 (R1359.4) When this signal is output, ROBODRILL resets the tool group

(counter).

Turn this signal ON after specifying a tool group (counter)

number.

Keep it ON until the reset request reception signal (SI18_5) is

turned ON.

Turn it OFF as soon as the reset request reception signal isturned ON.




request reception

SI18_5 (R1318.5) This signal indicates that ROBODRILL has accepted a tool

group (counter) reset request.

Turn the reset request signal (SO9.4) OFF after this signal is

turned ON.

This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal

(SO9_4) is turned OFF.


error

SI18_6 (R1318.6) This signal indicates that an error occurred during an attempt

to reset a tool group (counter).This signal is turned OFF when the reset request signal

(SO9_4) is turned OFF.

SUPPLEMENTTo specify 0 as the tool group (counter) number (to specify the currently selectedtool group), specify tool group selection (M06 T1xx) after power-on, then issue areset request.If a reset request is issued without specifying tool group selection, an error(SI18_6 = ON) occurs.

Tool group reset error

Group number specification

ON

ON

Tool group number

Tool group reset request

Tool group reset request reception

ON

- 118 -



B-85314EN-1/01


- 119 -

(2) Information about the life of each tool group (counter) and the currently selected tool group

(counter) number

Information about the life of each tool group (counter) can be indicated.

The group (counter) number of the tool currently used can be indicated.

(System ladder Custom ladder)Signal Address Function

Currently selected tool

group (counter) number

SI32_0 (R1332.0)

⏐

SI32_7 (R1332.7)

The currently selected tool group (counter) number is indicated

as binary data.

0 is indicated if tool group selection (M06 T1**) has not been

specified since power-on.

Tool life end SI33_0 (R1333.0)

⏐

SI34_7 (R1334.7)

SI50_0 (R1400.0)

⏐

SI63_7 (R1413.7)

Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in the

life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the life end

state.

Near tool life end SI35_0 (R1335.0)⏐

SI36_7 (R1336.7)

SI64_0 (R1414.0)

⏐

SI77_7 (R1427.7)

Whether the currently selected tool group (counter) is in thenear life end state is indicated. A signal of 1 indicates the near

life end state.

1 can also indicate the life end state.

(3) Others



Tool life end (tool

group)

SI10_7 (R1310.7) ON when at least one of the registered tool groups (counters) is

in the life end state.

Near tool life end SI11_6 (R1311.6) ON when the use count (or time) for the currently used tool group(counter) reaches the value set for advance notice of tool life

end.



Tool breakage SO7_0 (R1357.0) When the tool life management function is used and this signal is

ON, the currently used tool is assumed to reach its tool life end. If

a spare tool is registered to the tool group, the new tool is used at

the next tool replacement. If no spare tool is registered, an alarm is

issued at the end of machining.


command.



B-85314EN-1/01


12.12 ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL

(1) I/O signals for additional axis clamp control can be assigned with custom PMC.


Clamp check

(4th axis)

SO10_4

(R1360.4)

Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the

system ladder program.

Unclamp check

(4th axis)

SO10_5

(R1360.5)

Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (4th axis) to the


Clamp check

(5th axis)

SO10_6

(R1360.6)

Outputs the clamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the


Unclamp check

(5th axis)

SO10_7

(R1360.7)

Outputs the unclamp state of the additional axis (5th axis) to the


Clamp request

(5th axis)

SI31_0

(R1331.0)

Clamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)

Turned ON when the M68 command is issued.

Unclamp request

(5th axis)

SI31_1

(R1331.1)

Unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)

Turned ON when the M69 command is issued.

Clamped

(5th axis)

SI31_2

(R1331.2)

Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (5th axis)

Turned ON when the M68 command is issued and OFF when the

M69 command is issued.

Clamp request

(4th axis)

SI31_3

(R1331.3)

Clamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)

Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued.

Unclamp request

(4th axis)

SI31_4

(R1331.4)

Unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)

Turned ON when the M11 or M72 command is issued.

Clamped

(4th axis)

SI31_5

(R1331.5)

Clamp/unclamp command for the additional axis (4th axis)

Turned ON when the M10 or M71 command is issued and OFF when

the M11 or M72 command is issued.

(Sample ladder program)

X4.0 SO10_4

SI31_3 Y2.0

To use this function, set PMC parameter, keep relay K14#3 to 1.

(2) Specifying a command to clamp or unclamp an additional axis.Signal Address Function

4th-axis clamp (M10)

signal output command

SO8_0 (R1358.0) Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (4th

axis).

Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.

4th-axis unclamp (M11)


SO8_1 (R1358.1) Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis

(4th axis).


5th-axis clamp (M68)


SO8_2 (R1358.2) Specifies the command to clamp the additional axis (5th

axis).


5th-axis unclamp (M69)


SO8_3 (R1358.3) Specifies the command to unclamp the additional axis

(5th axis).Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms.

- 120 -



B-85314EN-1/01


- 121 -

12.13 OPERATOR'S PANEL

(1) Disabling the operator's panel

This function disables the ROBODRILL operator's panel.

To use this function, set PMC parameter keep relay K16#0 to 1.

(Custom ladder→ System ladder)

Signal description Address Function

Disabling of ROBODRILL

operator's panel

SO5_5 (R1355.5) Turning on this signal disables the ROBODRILL operator's

panel.

Turning on this signal causes the ROBODRILL to behave as follows:

• Some buttons and keys on the ROBODRILL operator's panel become unusable.

<DOOR OPEN/CLOSE> key is also made unusable (optionally).

However, <EMERGENCY STOP> button, < FEED HOLD > button, <RESET> key, soft key and

MDI keys (ALPHABET, FIGURE AND ETC.) remain usable.

• "OPERATION MODE" switches to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION (MEMORY) MODE."

If OPERATION MODE switching is impossible (for example, for "EMERGENCY STOPPING" or

"MODE SELECTION LOCKING"), however, switching to "AUTOMATIC OPERATION MODE"

does not occur.

• For "SPINDLE ROTATING" "IN COOLANT" "CUTTING AIR BLOW" and "CENTER

THROUGH COOLANT OUTPUT" each output is stopped (optionally)

• "DRY RUN MODE" and "SINGLE BLOCK MODE" are canceled.

• The M01 stop function is canceled (optionally).

• The cutting override value is fixed at 100% regardless of the dial setting on the operator's panel.

• The spindle override value is fixed at 100%.

• The rapid traverse override value is fixed at 100%.• If this signal is issued when the machine is running, it becomes valid after the machine stops.

• The diagnosis message "THE OPERATOR'S PANEL IS UNAVAILABLE." appears.

[PMC parameter, keep relay]

Parameter Function

K16#0 Operator's panel disable function 0 : Disables 1 : Enables

K16#1 While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the M01 stop button

0 : Disables 1 : Enables

K16#2 While the operator's panel is in the disabled state, the door open/close button


K16#3 While the operator's panel is disabled, spindle rotation and coolant supply

0 : Canceled 1 : Not canceledK16#4 While the operator's panel is disabled, the skip key


(2) Disabling the start button



Disabling of the machine

operator's panel start

button

SO4_0 (R1354.0) When this signal is ON, the start button on the ROBODRILL

operator's panel is disabled. External start (SO2_1) is

available regardless of the status of this signal.

During turret recovery operation and menu operation, the

start button is available regardless of the status of this signal.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 122 -

(3) Checking the lamps



Lamp check function ON SO5_7 (R1355.7) When this signal is ON, all LEDs and status indication lamps

(machine status output 1, 2, and 3) on the ROBODRILLoperator's panel are turned on.

12.14 OPERATION MODE SWITCHING



MEM mode selection SI8_0 (R1308.0)

MDI mode selection SI8_1 (R1308.1)

Handle mode selection SI8_2 (R1308.2)

Jog mode selection SI8_3 (R1308.3)

Reference mode selection SI8_4 (R1308.4)

Edit mode selection SI8_5 (R1308.5)

ON while the corresponding mode is selected.

The status of MEM mode selection (SI8_0) is related as

follows:

When K14#2 is 0: Memory mode and remote mode

When K14#2 is 1: Only memory mode



Switching of operation mode

(to the MEM mode)

SO7_2 (R1357.2)


(to the MDI mode)

SO7_3 (R1357.3)


(to the handle mode)

SO7_4 (R1357.4)

Switching of operation mode(to the edit mode)

SO7_5 (R1357.5)

Switches to the corresponding operation mode.

Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 123 -

12.15 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT



Production

completion

SI8_7 (R1308.7) ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 or 2 on the

counter screen displayed from the QUICK screen is greater than or

equal to the scheduled number of products.

Production

completion 1

SI11_4 (R1311.4) ON when the number of products indicated by counter 1 on the



Production

completion 2

SI11_5 (R1311.5) ON when the number of products indicated by counter 2 on the





Counter 1

(production count)

reset

S08_4 (R1358.4)

Counter 1 (total

production count)

reset

S08_5 (R1358.5)

Counter 2

(production count)

reset

S08_6 (R1358.6)

Counter 2 (total

production count)

reset

S08_7 (R1358.7)

Resets the corresponding counter.

Turn the signal ON for about 100 ms.

Counter screen

display

S09_0 (R1359.0) Turning this signal ON displays the counter screen.

Turning this signal OFF displays the previous screen again.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 124 -

12.16 MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT

The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps and others are

output. Each machine status output signal can be turned ON according to a desired condition.



Machine status output

1, 2, 3 (END1, 2, 3

output)

SI7_0 (R1307.0)

-

SI7_2(R1307.2)

The same signals as those of the relay contacts used for control

of status indication lamps and others are output. These signals

are set to the ON type even if blinking is selected as a screen

setting.

Select the status of each signal on MACHINE STATUS

OUTPUT displayed by selecting 6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING,

then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from the QUICK screen.

[Signal status]

ALARM: ON when an alarm is issued.

OPERATOR MESSAGE: ON when an operator message is

displayed.

PROGRAM EXECUTING: ON during the execution of a

program.

PROGRAM END: ON after the end of program

operation (execution of M00, M01,

M02, or M30).

PRODUCT COMPLETED: ON at the completion of production

(production management function on

the QUICK screen).

FEED HOLD: ON when the stop button lamp on the

operator's panel is ON.

NOTICE OF TOOL LIFE: ON when the remaining use count forthe last tool in the tool group is

smaller than or equal to the count for

advance notice.



Machine status output

1, 2, 3 request

SO5_2 (R1355.2)

-

SO5_4 (R1355.4)

The relay contacts used for control of status indication lamps

and others are turned ON. When a signal is ON, the

corresponding relay contact is ON.

Since the ON/OFF status of these relay contacts is also

controlled by the system ladder program, the relay contact may

remain ON even when the corresponding signal is OFF. Tocontrol these relay contacts only by the custom ladder program,

set all MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT items to OFF. MACHINE

STATUS OUTPUT is displayed by selecting

6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING, then 13.EXT. INTERFACE from

the QUICK screen.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 125 -

12.17 COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING COOLANT,CENTER THROUGH COOLANT, AND AIR BLOW

(System ladder Custom ladder)Signal Address Function

Machine interior cleaning

coolant output ON

SI9_4 (R1309.4) ON when machine interior cleaning coolant pump ON is

specified.

Coolant output ON SI11_0 (R1311.0) ON when coolant ON is specified.

Air blow ON SI11_3 (R1311.3) ON when air blow ON is specified.

Center through coolant output

ON

SI11_7 (R1311.7) ON when center through coolant ON is specified.

Center through coolant pump

ON

SI24_3 (R1324.3) ON when center through coolant pump ON is specified.

Center through coolant ON SI24_4 (R1324.4) ON when center through coolant ON is specified.

Air purge ON SI24_5 (R1324.5) ON when air purge ON is specified.



Machine interior cleaning

coolant ON/OFF

SO7_7 (R1357.7) Controls the machine interior cleaning coolant. Turning

this signal OFF stops the machine interior cleaning

coolant output.

Since the ON/OFF status of the machine interior cleaning

coolant is also controlled by the system ladder program,

the machine interior coolant may not be output by turning

this signal ON.

This signal is not effective when "MACHINE INTERIOR

CLEANING COOLANT" is set to OFF on the standard

selection screen displayed by selecting

6:MAINTENANCE/SETTING on the QUICK screen.

This signal is enabled when K14#4 is 1.

Center through coolant pump

ON/OFF

SO19_0 (R1369.0)

Center through coolant

ON/OFF

SO19_1 (R1369.1)

Center through Air purge

ON/OFF

SO19_2 (R1369.2)

The corresponding device is turned ON or OFF.


relevant command. When the command is specified, the

status of each device is changed as follows:

When it is OFF: ON

When it is ON: OFF

12.18 COMPLETION OF MACHINING



End of program SI9_3 (R1309.3) ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified. (M01 is valid only

when the temporary stop key on the operator's panel is ON.)

Completion of

machining

SI15_5 (R1315.5) ON when M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified.

OFF when the next operation starts, the reset key on the

operator's panel is pressed, the emergency stop button is

pressed, or the manual mode is selected.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 126 -

12.19 FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL



Splash guard door

closed state

SI9_5 (R1309.5) ON when the front door is locked.



Door unlock SO9_3 (R1359.3) When the front door is locked, turning this signal ON unlocks the

door. When the front door is unlocked and is not open, turning

this signal ON locks the door. When the front door is open, this

signal is not effective. Turn this signal ON for about 100 ms when

specifying the relevant command.

12.20 AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL



Automatic side door

closed state

SI9_6 (R1309.6) ON when the automatic side door is in the closed limit position (the

proximity switch is ON).

Automatic side door

open state

SI9_7 (R1309.7) ON when the automatic side door is in the open limit position (the

proximity switch is ON).



Automatic side dooropen request

SO3_6 (R1353.6) While this signal is ON, the air valve for opening the automatic sidedoor is ON. (System side control is not exercised.)

Automatic side door

close request

SO3_7 (R1353.7) While this signal is ON, the air valve for closing the automatic side

door is ON. (System side control is not exercised.)

Door interlock SO4_6 (R1354.6) Turning this signal ON stops program operation, spindle rotation,

coolant output, and other operations in the same way as when the

front door is opened.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 127 -

12.21 AI TOOL MONITOR



Warning level

detection

SI10_3 (R1310.3) ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle

during machining exceeds the warning level.

OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed.

OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1)

When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D12 is compared with

the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load

on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON

regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.

Breakage level

detection

SI10_4 (R1310.4) ON when the AI tool monitor is used and the load on the spindle

during machining exceeds the breakage level.

OFF when the reset key on the operator's panel is pressed.

OFF when tool replacement is specified. (when K08#6 is 1)

When K08#7 is 1, the value set in data table D14 is compared with

the load on the spindle while the spindle is rotating. When the load

on the spindle exceeds the setting, this signal is turned ON

regardless of whether the AI tool monitor function is used.

12.22 SPINDLE



Spindle stop SI10_5 (R1310.5) ON when the spindle stops (forward or reverse spindle rotation is

not specified).

S command SI20_0 (R1320.0)

-

SI23_7 (R1323.7)

The specified S code is output as binary data.

Example) When S8000 is specified

Addresses: R1323 R1322 R1321 R1320

Bits: 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210

Data: 00000000 00000000 00011111 01000000

M03 command SI24_0 (R1324.0) ON when the M03 command is specified.

M05 command SI24_1 (R1324.1) ON when the M05 command is specified.

Spindle rotation

button ON

SI24_2 (R1324.2) On when the spindle rotation/stop button on the operator's panel is

pressed.



No spindle rotating SO9_6 (R1359.6) Spindle rotation is disabled while this signal is ON.

When the spindle is rotating, turning this signal ON stops the

rotation of the spindle. When this signal is ON, specifying spindle

rotation causes an alarm.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 128 -

12.23 SCREEN DISPLAY



Display in Japanese SI12_0 (R1312.0)

Display in German SI12_1 (R1312.1)

Display in French SI12_2 (R1312.2)

Display in Italian SI12_4 (R1312.4)

Display in Korean SI12_5 (R1312.5)

Display in Spanish SI12_6 (R1312.6)

Display in English SI12_7 (R1312.7)

Display in Chinese

(Simplified)

SI37_0 (R1337.0)

Display in Portuguese SI37_1 (R1337.1)

Display in Russian SI37_2 (R1337.2)

ON when the corresponding display language is set.

12.24 POSITION SWITCH

When the tool is positioned within the operation range specified for NC parameters along a servo axis, the

corresponding signal is turned ON.

(Example 1)

To turn position switch 1 ON within a range between 100.000 and 200.000 along the X-axis:

No. 6910 = 1, No. 6930 = 200.000, No. 6950 = 100.000

(Example 2)

To turn position switch 2 ON within a range between -100.000 and -200.000 along the Y-axis:No. 6911 = 2, No. 6931 = -100.000, No. 6951 = -200.000



Position switch 1 SI13_0 (R1313.0) Axis specification: No. 6910

Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6930

Minimum value in the operation range: No. 6950







Position switch 4 SI13_3 (R1313.3) Axis specification: No. 6913Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6933











Position switch 8 SI13_7 (R1313.7) Axis specification: No. 6917Maximum value in the operation range: No. 6937




B-85314EN-1/01


- 129 -

12.25 CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS



Movement along the X-

axis

SI14_0 (R1314.0)

Movement along the Y-

axis

SI14_1 (R1314.1)

Movement along the Z-

axis

SI14_2 (R1314.2)

Movement along the

4th axis

SI14_3 (R1314.3)

Movement along the

5th axis

SI14_4 (R1314.4)

ON when the tool is moving along the corresponding axis.

ON when the corresponding axis is selected in handle mode.

Completion of X-axis

reference position

return

SI15_0 (R1315.0)

Completion of Y-axis

reference position

return

SI15_1 (R1315.1)

Completion of Z-axis

reference position

return

SI15_2 (R1315.2)

Completion of 4th-axis

reference position

return

SI15_3 (R1315.3)

Completion of 5h-axis

reference position

return

SI15_4 (R1315.4)

ON at the completion of one of the following operations:

• Manual reference position return

• Automatic reference position return (G28)

• Reference position return check (G27)

OFF when the tool moves from the reference position along the

corresponding axis or the machine enters the emergency stop or

servo alarm state.

Not turned ON when the tool moves to the machine zero point

manually or according to the G00 or G01 command and when

the tool is positioned at the machine zero point along the

corresponding axis at the termination of tool replacement.

Establishment of X-

axis reference position

SI18_0 (R1318.0)

Establishment of Y-


SI18_1 (R1318.1)

Establishment of Z-axis

reference position

SI18_2 (R1318.2)

Establishment of 4th-


SI18_3 (R1318.3)

Establishment of 5th-


SI18_4 (R1318.4)

ON when the reference position is established along the

corresponding axis.

OFF when the reference position is lost.

OFF until the reference position is determined by the absolute

position detector at power-on.



X-axis interlock SO4_1 (R1354.1)

Y-axis interlock SO4_2 (R1354.2)

Z-axis interlock SO4_3 (R1354.3)

4th-axis interlock SO4_4 (R1354.4)

5th-axis interlock SO4_5 (R1354.5)

Turning these signals OFF inhibits the movement along the

corresponding axes.

When a signal is turned OFF while the tool is moving, the tool

decelerates and stops along the corresponding axis. When the

signal is turned ON, the tool restarts moving.

These signals are effective when K14#5 is 1.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 130 -

12.26 CUSTOM MACROS



Input signal for

custom macro

(#1100), (#1132)

SI25_0 (R1325.0)

(#1101), (#1132) SI25_1 (R1325.1)

(#1102), (#1132) SI25_2 (R1325.2)

(#1103), (#1132) SI25_3 (R1325.3)

(#1104), (#1132) SI25_4 (R1325.4)

(#1105), (#1132) SI25_5 (R1325.5)

(#1106), (#1132) SI25_6 (R1325.6)

(#1107), (#1132) SI25_7 (R1325.7)

(#1108), (#1132) SI26_0 (R1326.0)

(#1109), (#1132) SI26_1 (R1326.1)(#1110), (#1132) SI26_2 (R1326.2)

(#1111), (#1132) SI26_3 (R1326.3)

(#1112), (#1132) SI26_4 (R1326.4)

(#1113), (#1132) SI26_5 (R1326.5)

(#1114), (#1132) SI26_6 (R1326.6)

(#1115), (#1132) SI26_7 (R1326.7)

ON when macro statement #11**=1 (**: 00 to 15) is executed. OFF

when #11**=0 is specified.

When #1132=nn (nn: 2-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is

output to SI25_0 to SI26_7 as binary data.

Input signals for

custom macro

(#1133)

SI27_0 (R1327.0)

-

SI30_7 (R1330.7)

When #1133=nn (nn: 4-byte data) is specified, the value of nn is

output to SI27_0 to SI30_7 as binary data.



Output signal for

custom macro

(#1000), (#1032)

SO12_0 (R1362.0)

(#1001), (#1032) SO12_1 (R1362.1)

(#1002), (#1032) SO12_2 (R1362.2)

(#1003), (#1032) SO12_3 (R1362.3)

(#1004), (#1032) SO12_4 (R1362.4)

(#1005), (#1032) SO12_5 (R1362.5)

(#1006), (#1032) SO12_6 (R1362.6)

(#1007), (#1032) SO12_7 (R1362.7)

(#1008), (#1032) SO13_0 (R1363.0)

(#1009), (#1032) SO13_1 (R1363.1)

(#1010), (#1032) SO13_2 (R1363.2)

(#1011), (#1032) SO13_3 (R1363.3)

(#1012), (#1032) SO13_4 (R1363.4)

(#1013), (#1032) SO13_5 (R1363.5)

(#1014), (#1032) SO13_6 (R1363.6)

(#1015), (#1032) SO13_7 (R1363.7)

Turning each signal ON sets the corresponding system variable

#1000 to #1015 to 1.

When the signal is OFF, the corresponding system variable is set to

0.

Outputting binary data (2-byte data) to SO12_0 to SO13_7 sets the

data in #1032.

Cannot be used when a pallet changer of KAWATATEC or a tool

monitor of Nodeman is attached.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 131 -

12.27 M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS

The number of the specified M code (first M code) is output as binary data.

Use these signals together with functional instruction No. 25: binary decode processing for M code

decode and other processing.

(CNC Custom ladder)


M code F10.0 - F13.7 The number of the specified M code is output as binary data.

Example) When M200 is specified:

Addresses : F13 F12 F11 F10

Bits: 76543210 76543210 76543210 76543210

Data: 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000

12.28 OPERATION CONTROL(Custom ladder System ladder)


External start SO2_1 (R1352.1) In the memory, remote, or MDI operation mode, turning this signal

ON, then OFF starts operation.

When the machine has a front automatic door and "OPEN DOOR

WITH START BUTTON" of automatic door control is set to ON,

operation starts after the front automatic door is closed. (only

during memory or remote operation)


command.

External hold SO2_2 (R1352.2) Turning this signal OFF during operation causes the tool todecelerate and stop along each servo axis. When this signal is

OFF, memory operation, remote operation, MDI operation, and tool

replacement cannot be started.

Effective when K14#7 is 1.

External reset SO2_3 (R1352.3) Turning this signal ON causes the ROBODRILL to perform the

following operations:

• Decelerates and stops the tool along the controlled axis along

which it is moving.

• Enters the reset state.

Cancels the alarms that can be released.

External

emergency stop

SO2_4 (R1352.4) Turning this signal OFF puts the ROBODRILL into the emergency

stop state. This signal provides emergency stop control at the

software level. Examine emergency stop control at the hardware

level as required.


Single block mode

ON

SO2_6 (R1352.6) Turning this signal ON puts the ROBODRILL into the single block

operation mode. Effective when K08#3 is 1. At this time, the single

operation button on the operator's panel is disabled.

Dry run mode ON SO2_7 (R1352.7) Turning this signal ON puts the machine in the dry run operation

mode. Effective when K08#4 is 1. At this time, the dry operation

button on the operator's panel is disabled.

DNC operation SO3_3 (R1353.3) When the memory operation mode is selected, turning this signal

ON puts the machine in the remote operation mode.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 132 -

12.29 ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY



Alarm message

display in progress

SO5_0 (R1355.0) Turn this signal ON when an alarm message is displayed on the

custom PMC.

When this signal is ON, the system ladder program assumes that an

alarm message is displayed. The status indication lamps (machine

status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking is

selected for alarms)

Operator message

display in progress

SO5_1 (R1355.1) Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the

custom PMC.


operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps

(machine status output 1, 2, 3) are turned ON. (when on or blinking

is selected for operator messages)

This signal is not used when operator message display in progress2 (SO5_6) is used.

Operator message

display in progress

2

SO5_6 (R1355.6) Turn this signal ON when an operator message is displayed on the

custom PMC.


operator message is displayed. The status indication lamps

(machine status output 1, 2, 3) are not turned ON.

This signal is not used when operator message display in progress

(SO5_1) is used.

12.30 MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP



Machine interior

lamp ON

SO7_6 (R1357.6) Turning this signal ON turns the machine interior lamp on. Turning

this signal OFF turns the lamp off.

Effective when K08#0 is 1. At this time, the machine interior lamp

ON/OFF switch on the screen is disabled.

12.31 POWER-OFF



Power OFF request SO9_5 (R1359.5) Turns the ROBODRILL control power OFF.


command.

When the command is specified during operation, the control power

is turned OFF after the tool stops moving along axes and the spindle

stops rotating.



B-85314EN-1/01


- 133 -

12.32 OVERRIDE CONTROL

(1) Spindle override



Spindle override

command

SO15_0 (R1365.0)

-

SO15_7 (R1365.7)

The spindle override is specified as binary data.

An override of 0% to 254% can be specified.

When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed.

When no data is set in R1365 by the custom ladder program at

power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically

set.


Example) To specify 100%

Address: R1365

Bits: 76543210

Data: 01100100

(2) Cutting feed override(Custom ladder System ladder)


Cutting feed

override command

SO16_0 (R1366.0)

-

SO16_7 (R1366.7)

The cutting feed override is specified as binary data.

Specify the data [255 – (override-to-be-specified)].

An override of 0% to 254% can be specified.

When a value of 0 or 255 is specified, an override of 0% is assumed.

When no data is set in R1366 by the custom ladder program at

power-on, the data indicating an override of 100% is automatically

set.


Example) To specify 100%, set 155.

Address: R1366

Bits: 76543210

Data: 10011011



B-85314EN-1/01


- 134 -

12.33 ROBOT INTERFACE

(1) When only the automatic side door is controlled



Automatic side door

closed state

SI9_6 (R1309.6) ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the closed limit

position (the proximity switch for the closed limit position is ON).

Automatic side door

open state

SI9_7 (R1309.7) ON when the automatic side door (safety gate) is in the open limit

position (the proximity switch for the open limit position is ON).

System start SI78_3 (R1428.3) ON while the system start button is pressed (robot interface X17.4

= 1).

Teach mode SI79_3 (R1429.3) ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0).

Front door open SI79_4 (R1429.4) ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0).

Interaction mode SI79_5 (R1429.5) ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or

SO17_1 = 1).



Teach mode SO17_0 (R1367.0) When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that

robot teach operation is in progress (valid when K19#0 = 1).

Interaction/independe

nt operation switch

SO17_1 (R1367.1) When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL is placed in the

interaction mode. (When using this signal, do not use the X17.2

signal of the robot interface.)

Automatic side door

open

SO18_0 (R1368.0) When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety

gate) is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal

is ON for about 100 ms.

Automatic side doorclosed SO18_1 (R1368.1) When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safetygate) is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is

ON for about 100 ms.

System being started

lamp

SO20_2 (R1370.2) When this signal is set to ON, the "system being started" lamp is

turned on. (Robot interface Y7.1 is set to ON.)

(2) When the automatic side door and robot system are controlled



Robot system being

started

SI78_0 (R1428.0) ON when system operation is being started.

Cycle stop mode SI78_1 (R1428.1) ON when the cycle stop mode is set with the soft key [CYCLESTOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the cycle

stop command output from the custom PMC.

OFF when the cycle stop mode is terminated or canceled.

System stop mode SI78_2 (R1428.2) ON when the system stop mode is set with the soft key [SYSTEM

STOP] pressed on the robot operation screen or with the system

stop command output from the custom PMC.

OFF when the system stop mode is terminated or canceled.

Teach mode SI79_3 (R1429.3) ON when the teach mode is set (robot interface X16.6 = 0).

Front door open SI79_4 (R1429.4) ON when the front door is open (X8.1 = 0).

Interaction mode SI79_5 (R1429.5) ON when interaction is selected (robot interface X17.2 = 1 or

SO17_1 = 1).



B-85314EN-1/01


- 135 -



Teach mode SO17_0 (R1367.0) This signal is used when an address other then the robot teach in-

progress signal (X225.7) of the robot system is to be used or when a

condition is to be added.

When this signal is set to ON, the ROBODRILL assumes that robot

teach operation is in progress. (This signal is valid when K19#0 =

1.)

Interaction/independ

ent operation switch

SO17_1 (R1367.1) This signal provides the same function as the

interaction/independent input (X17.2) of the robot interface. When

this signal is set to ON, the robot system is placed in the interaction

mode.

(When using this signal, do not use X17.2.)

Robot system start SO17_2 (R1367.2) This signal provides the same function as the system start input

(X17.4) of the robot interface. When this signal is set to ON, system

operation is started. When using this signal, ensure that this signal

is ON for about 100 ms.

(This signal is valid when K25#3 = 1.)

Robot operation

screen display

SO17_3 (R1367.3) When this signal is set to ON, the robot operation screen is

displayed.

When this signal is set to OFF, the screen display returns to the

previous screen.



Robot system cycle

stop command

SO17_4 (R1367.4) This signal provides the same function as the soft key [CYCLE

STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON,

the cycle stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during the

cycle stop mode, the cycle stop mode is canceled. When using this

signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.

(This signal is valid when K25#0 = 1. When this signal is valid, the

[CYCLE STOP] key cannot be used.)

Robot system stop

command

SO17_5 (R1367.5) This signal provides the same function as the soft key [SYSTEM

STOP] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to ON,

the system stop mode is set. When this signal is set to ON during

the system stop mode, the system stop mode is canceled. When

using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.


[SYSTEM STOP] key cannot be used.)

Robot reset SO17_6 (R1367.6) This signal provides the same function as the soft key [ROBOT

RESET] on the robot operation screen. When this signal is set to

ON, the reset signal is output to the robot. When using this signal,ensure that this signal is ON for about 100 ms.


[ROBOT RESET] key cannot be used.)

Peripheral device

ready

SO17_7 (R1367.7) This signal posts the ready state of the peripheral device in the robot

system. Ensure that this signal is set to ON when the peripheral

device is ready. When this signal is OFF, system operation cannot

be started.

(This signal is valid when K21#4 = 1.)

Automatic side door

open

SO18_0 (R1368.0) When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate)

is opened. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for

about 100 ms.

Automatic side doorclosed

SO18_1 (R1368.1) When this signal is set to ON, the automatic side door (safety gate)is closed. When using this signal, ensure that this signal is ON for

about 100 ms.



B-85314EN-1/01

- 136 -


12.34 Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item

At the Periodical Maintenance Screen, cumulative value of customize item can be counted with the

desired condition by using following custom signal.



Customizing item 1

count signal

SO23_0 (R1373.0)

Customizing item 2

count signal

SO23_1 (R1373.1)

Customizing item 3

count signal

SO23_2 (R1373.2)

Customizing item 4

count signal

SO23_3 (R1373.3)

Customizing item 5

count signal

SO23_4 (R1373.4)

Customizing item 6

count signal

SO23_5 (R1373.5)

Customizing item 7

count signal

SO23_6 (R1373.6)

Customizing item 8

count signal

SO23_7 (R1373.7)

When “CUSTOM (TIME)” is selected as Count type, count the time

during the corresponding custom signal is ON.

When “CUSTOM (COUNT)” is selected as Count type, count the

number of the corresponding custom signal is changed from OFF to

ON.

When using “CUSTOM (COUNT)” as Count type, corresponding

signal is turned on more than 500 msec by custom ladder. If that

time is short, counting number may be skipped.

12.35 BLOCK SKIP

Effective when K08#1 is 1. At this time, the block skip buttons on the screen (standard operator's panel)

and operator's panel (operator's panel with the full keyboard) are disabled.



Block skip ON

( /, /1 )

SO7_1 (R1357.1) Turning this signal ON enables the block skip (/, /1) function.

Block skip ON

( /2 )

SO24_0 (R1374.0) Turning this signal ON enables the block skip ( /2 ) function.

Block skip ON

( /3 )


Block skip ON

( /4 )


Block skip ON

( /5 )


Block skip ON

( /6 )


Block skip ON

( /7 )


Block skip ON

( /8 )


Block skip ON

( /9 )




B-85314EN-1/01 13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS

13 USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL

INSTRUCTIONS

(Variable timer) Functional instruction No.: 3

Timer startcondition

Timer No.

Do not write any instructionsin this area.

Timer relay

• After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON.

• The effective timer Nos. are 121 to 200.

• For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address.

• Set the desired timer value on the PMC parameter - Timer screen.

• The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.

(Fixed timer) Functional instruction No.: 24

Timer startcondition

Time that the

timer is set for


Timer relay

Timer No.

• After the set time has passed, the specified timer relay turns ON.

• The effective timer Nos. are 1 to 140.

• For a timer relay, you can specify any desired address.

• The effective set times are 0 to 262136 (ms), in 8-ms increments.

- 137 -



13.USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS B-85314EN-1/01

(Rising edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 57

Start condition Register No.


Output

• If the start condition turns ON, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle.• The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once.

• The valid register No. range is the same as that for the falling edge detection function (SUB58).

(Falling edge detection) Functional instruction No.: 58

? ?

Start condition


OutputRegister No.

• If the start condition turns OFF, the output turns ON for a single scanning cycle.

• The effective register Nos. are 1 to 100. The same register No. may be specified only once.

• The valid register No. range is the same as that for the rising edge detection function (SUB57).

- 138 -




(Counter) Functional instruction No.: 5


Countup outputCounter No.

Control condition Control Function

0 Starts the counter with 0.CN0

1 Starts the counter with 1.

0 Up counterUPDOWN

1 Down counter

0 Cancels a reset.RST

1 Resets a counter.

0 Deactivates a timer. ACT

1 Activates a timer.

• The output turns ON when the setting becomes equal to the count.

• The effective counter Nos. are 40 to 69.

• To control RST and ACT, use a pulse signal. RST and ACT function at the rising edge of a pulse

signal.

• For the counter output, you can specify any desired address.

• Enter the desired setting on the PMC parameter - Counter screen.

• The effective counter settings are 0 to 32767.

- 139 -




(Jump) Functional instruction No.: 10

(Jump end) Functional instruction No.: 30

Do not write any instructions in this area.

Start condition

Do not write any instructions in these areas.

Number of coils to jump over

• If the start condition turns ON, control jumps over the specified number of coils without executing

them at all.

• If specifying the number of coils, do not use JMPE (SUB30).

• If the number of coils is set to 0, control jumps over the JMP (SUB10) to JMPE (SUB30) section.

• Control jumps over any functional instructions.

(Common line control) Functional instruction No.: 9

(Common line control end) Functional instruction No.: 29

Do not write any instructions in this area.

Start condition

Do not write any instructions in these areas.

No. of coils to be turned off

• If the start condition turns OFF, the specified number of coils are turned OFF.

• If specifying the number of coils, do not use COME (SUB29).

• If the number of coils is set to 0, the COM (SUB9) to COME (SUB29) section are turned OFF.

• Any functional instructions will be executed even if the start condition with the COM instruction is

OFF, but the output of the execution results will be turned OFF.

• In a range specified with a COM, you cannot specify another COM.

• The output of WRT.NOT (inverted output of logic operation result) will be "1" if the start condition

with the COM instruction is OFF.

- 140 -




(Binary decoding) Functional instruction No.: 25

Startcondition

A

B

C

D

The following explanation is limited to those cases in which specified M codes are to be decoded.

Parameter Function

A Format specification Set a format in the format of 0nn4, where nn specifies that 8 x nn M codes are

to be decoded.

nn may be 0 to 99.

If 0 is specified, eight M codes will be decoded.

Examples:

To decode M200 to M205, set 0014(14).




B Code data address Set F10.C Decoding instruction No. Specify the number of the first M code to be decoded.

Example: To decode M codes starting with M200, set 200.

D Decoding result output

address

Specify an unused internal relay (R address).

If the nn in the format specification is 0 or 1, 1 bytes is required; otherwise,

consecutive nn bytes are required.

In the above examples:

If M200 is specified, R2100.0 is ON.



:


- 141 -




- 142 -

(Conditional subprogram call) Functional instruction No.: 65

(Unconditional subprogram call) Functional instruction No.: 66

Subprogram number called

Call condition

• If the conditional subprogram call instruction CALL (SUB65) is specified, the specified subprogram

is called only when the call condition is ON.

• If the unconditional subprogram call instruction CALLU (SUB66) is specified, the specified

subprogram is called unconditionally.



B-85314EN-1/01 14.SETTING PARAMETERS

- 143 -

14 SETTING PARAMETERS

Parameter Function

K03#6 Center through coolant pump control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K08#0 ON/OFF control of the lamp inside the

machine

0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K08#1 Block skip ON/OFF control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K08#3 Single-block ON/OFF control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K08#4 Dry run ON/OFF control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K14#0 Custom PMC editing 0: Enabled 1: Disabled

K14#1 Spindle/cutting override control by custom

PMC

0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K14#2 Signal "ON" condition of S18.0 0: Memory mode and

remote mode

1: Memory mode only

K14#3 Additional axis clamp control signal 0: Standard address 1: Allocated with customPMC

K14#4 Machine interior cleaning coolant control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K14#5 Interlock control for each axis 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K14#6 Emergency stop control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K14#7 Feed hold control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K15#7 Custom PMC function 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K16#0 Operator's panel disable function 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K16#1 While the operator's panel is in the disabled

state, the M01 stop button


K16#2 While the operator's panel is in the disabled

state, the door open/close button


K16#3 While the operator's panel is disabled,spindle rotation and coolant supply

0 : Canceled 1 : Not canceled

K16#4 While the operator's panel is disabled, the

skip key

0 * Disables 1 : Enables

K19#0 Teaching signal control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K25#0 Cycle stop control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K25#1 System stop control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K25#2 Robot reset control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K25#3 System startup control 0: Not controlled 1: Controlled

K : PMC parameter, keep relay

#* : *-th bit



15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST B-85314EN-1/01

- 144 -

15 ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

15.1 Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC AlarmScreen

The following table lists the PMC alarm messages that may be displayed on the PMC alarm screen.

Alarm number Faulty location/cor recti ve act ion Contents

ER01 PROGRAM DATA

ERROR

<1> Enter the sequence program again.

<2> If this error recurs even after you have

entered the sequence program again, the

error may be due to a hardware fault. In

that case, contact us.

The sequence program is invalid.

ER02 PROGRAM SIZEOVER

<1> Reduce the size of the sequenceprogram.

<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step

count option that allows you to set a

larger program size.

The sequence program is toolarge to load into the save area.


ER03 PROGRAM SIZE

ERROR(OPTION)

<1> Reduce the size of the sequence

program.

<2> Contact us, and specify a ladder step

count option that allows you to set a


The sequence program exceeds

the size specified by the ladder

step count option.

ER04 PMC TYPE

UNMATCH

Change the sequence program so that it

specifies the adequate PMC type, by using the

programmer.

The PMC type specified in the

sequence program does not

match the type of the PMCactually in use.

ER08 OBJECT UNMATCH Contact us. An unsupported function is used

in the sequence program.

ER09 PMC LABEL CHECK

ERROR. PLEASE TURN ON

POWER AGAIN WITH

PRESSING 'O'&'Z'. (CLEAR

PMC SRAM)

<1> Turn on the power of the CNC again, by

holding down the 'O' and 'Z' keys at the

same time.

<2> Replace the backup batteries.

The nonvolatile memory of the

PMC system needs to be

initialized in such cases as when

you have changed the PMC

model.

ER17 PROGRAM PARITY <1> Enter the sequence program again.


entered the sequence program again, the

error may be due to a hardware fault. In

that case, contact us.

The parity of the sequence

program is invalid.

ER18 PROGRAM DATA

ERROR BY I/O

Enter the sequence program again. Reading sequence program was

interrupted.

ER19 LADDER DATA

ERROR

Display the LADDER DIAGRAM EDITOR

screen again, and terminate the editing

operation by pressing the [EXIT] soft key.

During editing the ladder, the

screen display is switched to a

CNC screen by the operation of a

function key.

ER22 NO PROGRAM Enter the sequence program again. The sequence program is empty.

ER27 LADDER FUNC. PRM

IS OUT OF RANGE

Correct the sequence program; change the

parameter number specified in a functional

instruction to a value that is within the

allowable range.

An out-of-range parameter

number is specified in the TMR,

TMRB, TMRBF, CTR, CTRB,

DIFU, or DIFD functional

instruction.

ER33 I/O Link ERROR(CHn)

(Note3)

Contact us; replace the faulty hardware. The LSI for the I/O Link is faulty.



B-85314EN-1/01 15.ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST

- 145 -


ER34 ER34 I/O Link ERROR

(CHn Gxx)

(Note1)(Note3)

<1> Check the cable connections to the

devices of group xx.

<2> Check whether the power of each I/O

device has been turned on before the

CNC.

<3> Replace any device of group xx in which

the PMC control module is embedded.

An I/O device communication

error occurred on the slave side

of group xx.

ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT

DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx)

(Note1)(Note3)

Reduce the output data count of group xx. The output data count of I/O Link

group xx exceeds the upper limit

(33 bytes).

Or the output data count of I/O

Link i group “xx” exceeds the

upper limit (65 bytes for the

normal I/O, 29 bytes for the

safety I/O).

The superfluous data is regarded

as invalid.

ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT

DATA IN GROUP(CHn Gxx)

(Note1)(Note3)

Reduce the input data count of group xx. The input data count of I/O Link

group xx exceeds the upper limit

(33 bytes).

Or the input data count of I/O

Link i group “xx” exceeds the

upper limit (65 bytes for the

normal I/O, 29 bytes for the

safety I/O). The superfluous data

is regarded as invalid.

ER37 TOO MUCH SLOT IN

BASE(CHn)(Note3)

Correct the slot number to a value of 10 or

less.

The slot number for the I/O Link

exceed the upper limit (10). Theslot number larger than 11 is

regarded as invalid.

ER38 MAX SETTING

OUTPUT DATA OVER(CHn

Gxx)

(Note1)(Note3)

<1> In case of I/O Link, reduce the total

amount of output data of all groups to 128

bytes or less.

<2> In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total

amount of output data of all groups to 256

bytes or less.

The I/O area for the I/O Link is

insufficient.

(The area allocated to the group

“xx” and later on the output side

is regarded as invalid.)

In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area

is insufficient in the normal

update cycle mode.

ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT

DATA OVER(CHn xx)(Note1)(Note3)

<1> In case of I/O Link, reduce the total

amount of input data of all groups to 128bytes or less.

<2> In case of I/O Link i, reduce the total

amount of input data of all groups to 256

bytes or less.

The I/O area for the I/O Link is

insufficient.

(The area allocated to the group

“xx” and later on the input side is

regarded as invalid.)

In case of I/O Link i, The I/O area

is insufficient in the normal

update cycle mode.

ER43 PROGRAM DATA

ERROR(PT/NT)

<1> Store sequence program which is

compiled again after recompilations using

FANUC LADDER-III.

<2> If you see the same alarm again after

<1>, contact us.


ER45 NO OPTION

(FUNCTION BLOCK)

Add a required function block option. No function block option is

specified.




- 146 -


ER46 MESSAGE DATA

UPDATE ERROR.

PLEASE TRUN OFF

POWER AFTER SAVING

DATA.

Save the corrected sequence program or

message data for multi-language display to F-

ROM. Moreover, turn the power off/on.

The message data in the

sequence program or the

message data for multi-language

display cannot be updated. It is

necessary to turn off/on the

power. The ladder program

cannot be executed when this

alarm occurs.

ER47 ILLEGAL OVERRIDE

FUNCTION SETTING (TOO

MANY PMC PATHS)

The override mode of the force I/O function is

available in 3 or less PMC paths in same time.

In some PMC paths, make the function invalid.

Moreover, turn the power off/on.

The override function is enabled

in four or more PMC paths.

ER48 STEP SEQUENCE

TIME OVER(xxH)

Remove the setting of exceeding setting time

on the STEP SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR

SETTING screen.

The activated condition of step

sequence exceeds the time limit,

which is set on the STEP

SEQUENCE TIME MONITOR

SETTING screen.

ER50 PMC EXECUTION

ORDER ERROR

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11900 to 11904. The execution order setting of the

multi-PMC function is invalid.

ER51 PMC EXECUTION

PERCENTAGE ERROR

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11905 to 11909. The execution percentage setting

of the multi-PMC function is

invalid.

ER52 I/O Link CHANNEL

ASSIGNMENT ERROR

(Note3)

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11910 to 11912. The I/O Link channel assignment

to the PMC system is invalid.

ER54 NC-PMC I/F

ASSIGNMENT ERROR

Check CNC parameter Nos. 11920 to 11929. The interface assignment

between NC and PMC is invalid.

ER55 LEVEL1 EXECUTION

CYCLE ERROR

Check CNC parameter No. 11930. The ladder level 1 execution

cycle setting is invalid.ER57 MULTI-PATH PMC I/F

ASSIGNMENT ERROR

Check CNC parameter No. 11932. The assignment of multi-path

PMC interface is invalid.

ER58 PMC MEMORY TYPE

SETTING ERROR

Check CNC parameter No.11940 to No.11944. The setting of PMC Memory

Type is invalid.

ER60 I/O Link i

ERROR(CHn)

(Note3)

Contact us. Exchange of the hardware. The LSI for I/O Link i is faulty.

ER61 I/O Link i ERROR(CHn

Gxx)

(Note1) (Note3)

<1> Check the cable connected to the device

of group “xx”.

<2> Check the power supply of the I/O device

if the power is turned on earlier than the

power of CNC.<3> Exchange the I/O device in group “xx” in

which PMC control module is built.

The connection error occurred in

the slave of group “xx”.

ER62 I/O Link i DCS ERROR

(Note3)

Contact us. Exchange of the hardware. The LSI for I/O Link i DCS is

faulty.

ER63 I/O Link CHANNEL

SETTING ERROR

(Note3)

<1> Change the channel configuration in order

to reduce the I/O points. As for the

communication method for each channel,

specify the CNC parameter No. 11933#0

and 1.

Total I/O points are over

4096/4096 points in system.

For the I/O Link, the I/O points

are 1024/1024 points for one

channel. For the I/O Link i,

2048/2048 points for one

channel.

ER64 I/O Link i TOO MANY

CONNECTED

GROUPS(CHn)

(Note3)

Reduce the number of connected I/O devices

to 24 or less.

25 or more of I/O devices are

connected in channel “n”.




- 147 -



SLOTS(CHn)

(Note3)

Reduce the number of connected I/O modules

to 256 or less.

257 or more of I/O modules are

connected in channel “n”.

ER66 I/O Link i PMC

ADDRESS OVERLAPPED

(PMCm X(Y)nnnn)

(Note3)

Enter the PMC address or size again so that

any address is not used by multiple PMCs that

share PMC memory.

The address X(Y)”nnnn”

assigned in PMC path “m” is

assigned to another PMC path

that is shared the common

memory with PMC path “m”.


SAFETY I/O GROYPS

(Note3)

Reduce the group number of safety I/O. The total group number of safety

I/O in PMC paths exceed 4 or the

total group number of safety I/O

in DSCPMC exceed 4 for I /O

Link i.


ASSIGNMENTS IN HIGH

SPEED MODE (CHn,Gyy)

(Note1) (Note3)

When there are some groups which is set to

high-speed update cycle mode in I/O Link i,

Correct the transmission timing. Refer to

subsection “3.4.6”.

In the channel n, the

transmission size exceeds the

limit of high-speed mode for I/O

Link i. The assignment of group

“yy” or later cannot be performed.

ER69 I/O Link i

ASSIGNMENT ADDRESS

INVALID(CHn Gyy)

(Note2)(Note3)

Correct the assignment data of I/O Link i. The address of false PMC path is

assigned in group “yy” of channel

“n” of I/O Link i assignment data.

ER70 PMC ADDRESS

BLOCK OVERLAPPED

BETWEEN I/O Link AND I/O

Link i(PMCm X(Y)nnnn)

(Note3)

<1> Delete the assignment data for I/O Link i

or correct the assignment address.

<2> Correct the X/Y address block of the I/O

Link channel. (The setting of Machine

signal interface of PMC configuration

parameter)

<3> Check the communication method of I/OLink. (NC parameter 11933#0,#1)

<4> Check the setting of the selectable

assignment data function for I/O Link i.

There is a PMC address block

which is assigned in both I/O Link

and I/O Link i.

ER71 I/O Link i STATUS

ALARM LENGTH OVER IN

GROUP(CHn Gxx)

(Note1)(Note3)

Correct the configuration of I/O devices and

reduce the total of the status alarms to

64bytes or less.

The total of the status alarms for

I/O devices connected with group

“xx” of channel “n” exceeds 64

bytes

ER89 EDITING I/O

CONFIGURATION DATA IS

NOT COMPLETED

Finish the edit of I/O configuration data. I/O configuration data is invalid

because that the editing of the

I/O configuration data is in the

midst.

ER90 TOO LARGE I/OCONFIGURATION DATA

(Note3)

Reduce the I/O configuration data file. I/O configuration data is largerthan the save area or invalid.

ER91 I/O CONFIGURATION

DATA PARITY

(Note3)

<1> Input I/O configuration data file again.

<2> When re-input cannot solve this error, the

hardware may be failure. Contact us.

The parity of I/O configuration

data is invalid.


DATA ERROR BY I/O

Input I/O configuration data file again. Reading of I/O configuration file

is interrupted.

ER93 UNSUPPORTED I/O

CONFIGURATION DATA

(Note3)

Correct the type of I/O configuration data and

input again.

The type of I/O configuration data

is invalid.


DATA ERROR

(Note3)

Re-compile the I/O configuration data by FL-

III. Moreover, input again.

Data configuration of I/O

configuration data is abnormal.




- 148 -


ER95 I/O DEVICE

MISMATCH(CHn)

(Note3)

When this alarm occurs on a well-worked

machine, the causes may be following:

<1> Disconnection of communication cable or

contact fault.

<2> The power of an I/O device is turned off.

Or the power on is delayed.

<3> The failure of an I/O device.

<4> The power of some I/O devices remain

when the power of CNC is turned off/on.

Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on


When this alarm occurs during a debugging of

sequence program, the following causes also

come up.

<5> The configuration (type, order or number)

of the I/O devices is wrong.<6> Invalid I/O configuration data is registered.

You can confirm the error I/O device in the “I/O

Device Monitor” screen.

This alarm occurs when actual

I/O devices connected to CNC

differ from the I/O configuration

data registered in the “I/O Device

Monitor” screen. The ladder

program runs regardless of the

occurrence of this alarm.

ER96 I/O Link MAX GROUP

OVER(CHn)

(Note3)

<1> Check the PMC paths and addresses of

first and second blocks of n channel on

configuration parameter setting screen.

<2> Check the total groups of first and second

block on I/O module assignment.

<3> Check the parameter setting of

"Selectable I/O Link assignment

function".

When dual assignment of I/O

Link channel is used, total groups

of first and second block exceeds

16 groups.

The ladder program runs

regardless of the occurrence of

this alarm.

ER97 I/O Link FAILURE(CHnGxx)

(Note1) (Note3)

When this alarm occurs on a well-workedmachine, the cause may be following.

<1> The failure of the cable or contact from

group (“xx” – 1) to “xx”.

<2> The power of an I/O device of group “xx”

or later is turned off. Or the power on is

delayed.

<3> The failure of an I/O device of group “xx”

or (“xx” – 1).

<4> The power of some I/O devices remain


Turn the power all of I/O devices off/on


If this alarm occurs during a debugging of

sequence program, the following causes also

come up.

<5> The group number of I/O device is invalid.

<6> The mistake of the assignment setting of

I/O modules.

<7> The mistake of the parameter setting of

"Selectable I/O Link assignment function"

<8> The mistake of the machine signal

interface setting.

You can confirm the details of the error in the

“I/O Device Monitor” screen.

This alarm occurs when less I/Odevices are connected.

This alarm occurs when a total

group count of the I/O module

assignment are different with one

of connected device count.

The ladder program runs

regardless of the occurrence of

this alarm.

WN02 OPERATE PANEL

ADDRESS

ERROR

Correct the Series 0 operator's panel address

that is set in the PMC system parameter.

The Series 0 operator's panel

address that is set in the PMC

system parameter is invalid.




- 149 -


WN03 ABORT NC-

WINDOW/EXIN

Modify the ladder program and turn on the

power of the CNC again. Refer to subsection

“4.15” for details.

The ladder program was stopped

while communication was in

progress between CNC and

PMC.

This alarm may cause the

WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, and

DISPB functional instructions to

malfunction.

WN07 LADDER SP

ERROR(STACK)

Correct the sequence program so that the

subprogram has eight or fewer levels of

nesting.

There are too many levels of

nesting (levels more than 8) for

the CALL or CALLU functional

instruction to call the

subprogram.

WN09 SEQUENCE

PROGRAM IS NOT

WRITTEN TO FLASH ROM

If you want to use the current sequence

program next time you power on the system,

write the sequence program to flash ROM. If

you have made any unwanted change to the

sequence program by mistake, read the

original sequence program from flash ROM.

You have changed the sequence

program using the LADDER

DIAGRAM EDITOR screen or

DATA I/O screen, but you have

not yet written the changed

sequence program to flash ROM.

If you shut down the system

without writing the changed

sequence program to flash ROM,

the changes you have made will

be lost next time you turn on the

power.

WN10 NO OPTION(STEP

SEQUENCE)

<1> Add the step sequence option.

<2> Arrange so that the step sequence

subprogram will not be called.

No step sequence option was

found when the system

attempted to execute a step

sequence.WN11 INCOMPATIBLE

FUNCTION

Compile the sequence program again with

FANUC LADDER-III or Ladder Editing

Package.

An incompatible functional

instruction is used in the

sequence program.

WN57 OVERRIDE

FUNCTION IS ACTIVE

The Override function is for debugging only.

So, please disable the function when shipping

the machine.

The Override function is

activated.

WN58 UNSUPPORTED

FUNCTION

Correct the sequence program with Ladder

editing function on PMC screen.

An unsupported functional

instruction is used in the

sequence program. The

functional instruction was

skipped.

WN59 MESSAGE FILESYMBOL UNDEFINED

Correct the error in the message file for multi-language display.

In the message file for multi-language display, a symbol that

does not exist in the ladder is

defined.

WN60 MESSAGE FILE

SYMBOL INVALID

Correct the error in the message file for multi-

language display.

In the message file for multi-

language display, a symbol other

than an A address is defined.

WN61 MESSAGE FILE

ADDRESS DUPLICATE


language display.

The A address area has a

duplicate definition between a

symbol and address or between

symbols.

WN62 MESSAGE FILE

NUMBER ERROR


language display.

A message number differs

between the ladder and message

file for multi-language display at

the same A address.




- 150 -


WN63 MESSAGE FILE IS

NOT WRITTEN TO FLASH

ROM

If you want to use the current message file for

multi-language display next time you power on

the system, write the message file to flash

ROM.

You have changed the message

data for multi-language display

using DATA I/O screen, but you

have not yet written the changed

message data to flash ROM. If

you shut down the system

without writing the changed

message data to flash ROM, the

changes you have made will be

nowhere next time you turn on

the power.

WN64 MESSAGE FILE SIZE

OVER

<1> Reduce the size of the message file for

multi-language display.

<2> Contact us and specify an option for a

larger size.

The message file for multi-

language display is too large to

load into the save area.

The message file for multi-

language display is invalid.

WN65 MESSAGE FILE

MISMATCH

Contact us. An unsupported function is used

in the message file for multi-

language display.

WN66 MESSAGE FILE

PARITY

<1> Enter the message file for multi-language

display again.


entered the message file for multi-

language display again, the error may be

due to a hardware fault. In that case,

contact us.

The parity of the message file for

multi-language display is invalid.

WN67 MESSAGE FILE

ERROR BY I/O

Enter the message file for multi-language

display again.

Reading the message file for

multi-language display was

interrupted.WN68 I/O CONFIGURATION

DATA IS NOT WRITTEN TO

FLASH ROM

If you want to make updated I/O configuration

data effective, write the data to Flash ROM.

The I/O configuration data was

updated in the I/O configuration

editor screen or data I/O screen

but the data has not been written

to Flash ROM yet. The data will

be lost if the save operation is not

performed.




- 151 -


WN69 I/O Link i DO ALARM

(CHn Gxx Syy zz : PMCm

Ybbb = **H )

(Note1)

Check DO of the relevant device. The DO alarm (ex. a short circuit

with the ground) occurs at byte

“zz” of slot “yy” of group “xx” in

channel “n”.

Y “bbbb” of PMC path ”m” is the

address at which the alarm

occurred.

DCSPMC Y”bbbb” is the address

for DCSPMC.

Display of “PMC*Y****” is the

case of occurrence of

unassigned address.

The “**H” shows some bits at

which the alarm occurs by

hexadecimal.(Ex. “PMC1Y115=28H” shows

the alarm occurs at Y115.3 and

Y115.5 in PMC1. “28H” means

“00101000” in binary. )

For the details of the alarm of I/O

devices, refer to the

“CONNECTION MANUAL

(HARDWARE)”.

WN70 I/O Link i STATUS

ALARM (CHn Gxx Syy zz =

**H)

(Note1)

Check the alarm information of applied I/O

device.

The status alarm except for the

DO alarm occurs at byte “zz” of

slot “yy” of group “xx” in channel

“n”.The “**H” shows some bits at

which the alarm occurs by

hexadecimal.

For the details of the alarm of I/O

devices, refer to the

“CONNECTION MANUAL

(HARDWARE)”.

NOTE1 The displayed group number in ER34, ER35, ER36, ER38, ER39, ER61, ER68,

ER71, ER97, WN69 and WN70 is wiring number of I/O device.

2 The group number displayed in ER69 is the number of I/O Link i assignmentdata.

3 When some PMC alarms related to I/O Link and I/O Link i occur, all of I/O

devices in all of channels do not be liked with the CNC.




- 152 -

15.2 PMC System Alarm Messages

Error Messages when SYS_ALM199 (PMC General) Alarm number Faulty locat ion/correcti ve act ion Contents

PC004 CPU INVALID INSTRUCTION

-----< ERROR POSITION >-----

MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC006 CPU INVALID SLOT

INSTRUCTION


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC009 CPU ADDRESS ERROR


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC010 DMA ADDRESS ERROR


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC012 CPU USER BREAK

EXCEPTION


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A CPU error occurred in the PMC

system.

PC030 RAM PARITY

PC030 S-RAM PARITY

-----< ERROR POSITION >-----MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A RAM parity error occurred in

the PMC system.

PC060 BUS ERROR


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A bus error occurred in the PMC

system.

PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE (PMCn)

PC070 LADDER SPE(PMCm)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A stack error occurred with the

SPE functional instruction of the

ladder program of n path.

PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE (PMCn)-----< ERROR POSITION >-----

MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A stack error occurred with theFBE functional instruction of the

ladder program of path n.

PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (TASK:xx)

PC072 STACK OVERFLOW (INT:xx)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A stack error occurred. (detected

by the software).

PC080 SYSTEM EMERGENCY


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

This alarm may be due to a main

board fault.

System emergency state of the

PMC LSI.




- 153 -

Alarm number Faulty locat ion/correcti ve act ion Contents

PC090 SYSTEM EMERGENCY

(SOFTWARE)

PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT

(SOFTWARE)

PC090 NON MASKABLE INTERRUPT

(UNKNOWN)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC093 UNEXPECTED INTERRUPT

(xx)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

CPU error (unexpected NMI)

occurs in PMC control software.

PC094 UNEXPECTED TRAP

EXCEPTION (xx)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

A trap exception of unknown

cause occurred with the PMC

control software.

PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR

(PMCn)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC096 LADDER CODE ERROR (___)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC097 LADDER CRC ERROR (PMCm)-----< ERROR POSITION >-----

MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

PC098 PMC SOFTWARE CRC ERROR

PC098 PMC SOFTWARE ECC ERROR

(_____:_)


MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

RAM check error occurred.

PC501 CNC/PMC INTERFACE ERROR

(PATHn)

-----< ERROR POSITION >-----MAIN BOARD

-----------------------------------------

The read or write operation

between CNC and PMC failed




- 154 -

Error Messages when SYS_ALM197 (PMC General) Alarm number Faulty locat ion/cor rective act ion Contents

PC070 ILLEGAL LADDER SPE

(DCSPMC)

-----< ERROR POSITION >-----CPU CARD

-----------------------------------------


SPE functional instruction of the

ladder program of DCSPMC.

PC071 ILLEGAL LADDER FBE

(DCSPMC)


CPU CARD

-----------------------------------------


FBE functional instruction of the

ladder program of DCSPMC.

PC095 MESSAGE CRC ERROR

(DCSPMC)


CPU CARD

-----------------------------------------

PC097 LADDER PARITY ERR

(DCSPMC)


CPU CARD

-----------------------------------------

This alarm may be due to a CPU

card fault.

RAM check error occurred.

Error Messages when SYS_ALM196 (PMC Watch Dog) Alarm number Faulty location/correcti ve act ion Contents

PC073 WATCH-DOG ALARM(CNC<-

>PMC)


MAIN BOARD-----------------------------------------

This alarm may be due to a main

board fault.

The PMC CPU is not running.

Error Messages when SYS_ALM195 (I/O Link) Alarm number Faulty location/correcti ve act ion Contents

PC050 I/O Link ER1 CHn:GRxx:yy

COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn :

GROUP xx

-----< ERROR POSITION>-----

CHn / GROUPxx

----------------------------------------

<1> Check the I/O device of group

“xx” in channel “n”

– Instantaneous power failure

– Unstable power line

<2> Check the I/O Link cable

between JD1B of group “xx”

and JD1A of group “xx-1”

– faulty wiring – incomplete contact

<3> The I/O Link device of group

“xx” in channel “n” is faulty.

An I/O Link communication error

occurred.

“n” is a channel number (1 to 3).

“xx” is a group number (0 to 15).

“yy” is a internal error code.

This error occurs when the

communication with the device of

group “xx” in channel “n” isstopped.

The causes are as follows:

– Instantaneous power failure,

unstable voltage or unstable

power line of the device

– Faulty wiring or incomplete

contact of communication cable

– Faulty device

Please note that It may not show

an accurate group number with

some conditions of the problem.




- 155 -

Alarm number Faulty location/correcti ve act ion Contents

PC051 I/O Link ER2 CHn:yy:xx:ww:vv

COMMUNICATION ALARM AT CHn

-----< ERROR POSITION>-----

CHn

----------------------------------------

<1> When you use an I/O Unit-

Model A, no base extension

unit is connected corresponding

to an I/O assignment data.

Check connection of I/O

devices and I/O assignment

data.

<2> When you use Power Mate as

I/O Link slave device and/or

Servo Motor Beta series I/O

Link option, some system alarm

occurs in such devices.

<3> A Communication may be

influenced by noise. Check the

ground wire and the shield of

the communication cables.

<4> The output of the I/O Linkdevices is short-circuited.

<5> The power of the I/O Link

master and/or slave devices is

faulty.

– Instantaneous power failure

– Unstable power line

<6> Incomplete contact of the

communication cable

<7> Faulty wiring of the

communication cable

<8> Check the grounding of the

shield wire of the earth terminalor the communication cable of

I/O devices.

<9> I/O Link devices are faulty.

<10>I/O Link master is faulty.

n=1,2: main board

n=3: CPU card

An I/O Link communication error

occurred.

“n” is a channel number (1 to 3).

“yy”, “xx”, “ww” and “vv” are

internal error code.

There are various causes as for

this error.

Error Messages when SYS_ALM194 (I/O Link i)


PC052 I/O Link I

PMC LSI RAM PARITY ERROR

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------MAIN BORAD

---------------------------------------------------

Change the main board. A RAM parity error occurred in

PMC LSI on the main board.

PC053 I/O Link I

SLAVE LSI RAM PARITY ERROR

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : “Unit name”

(Note1)

---------------------------------------------------

Change the I/O device of the unit. A RAM parity error occurred in

“y”th unit (group “x”) of channel

“n”.

PC054 I/O Link I

ABNORMAL POWER SUPPLY

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : “Unit name”(Note)

---------------------------------------------------

Check the power supply of the I/O

unit.

A power disconnection alarm

occurred in the “y”th unit (group

“x”) of channel “n”.




- 156 -


PC055 I/O Link I

I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / CNC <-> UNIT1(GROUP0)

CNC : MAIN BOARD

UNIT1 : “Unit name” (Note1)

---------------------------------------------------

Check whether any noise is inserted

between the CNC and 1st unit.

Check the ground status of the

slave device and the contact of the

connection cable.

A communication error occurred

between the CNC and 1st unit

(group 0) of channel “n”.

PC055 I/O Link I

I/O Link I SENDING DATA FAILURE

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1) <->

UNITy(GROUPx)

UNITy –1 : “Unit name” (Note1)

UNITy : “Unit name” (Note1)

---------------------------------------------------

Check whether there any noise is

inserted between the “y-1”th unit

(group “x-1”) and “y”th unit (group

“x”). Check the ground status of the

slave device and the contact of the

connection cable.

A communication error occurred

between the “y-1”th unit (group “x-

1”) and the “y”th unit (group “x”) of

channel “n”.

PC056 I/O Link I

I/O Link I DISCONNECTION

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / CNC <-> UNIT1(GROUP0)

CNC : MAIN BOARD

UNITy : “Unit name” (Note1)

---------------------------------------------------

Check whether there is

disconnection or incomplete contact

for the cable between the CNC and

1st unit (group 0).

Connection error occurred

between the CNC and 1st unit

(group 0) of channel “n”.

PC056 I/O Link I

I/O Link I DISCONNECTION

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / UNITy-1(GROUPx-1)<->

UNITy(GROUPx)

UNITy –1 : “Unit name” (Note1)

UNITy : “Unit name” (Note1)---------------------------------------------------

Check whether there is

disconnection or incomplete contact

of the cable between the “y-1”th unit

(group “x-1”) and “y”th unit (group

“x”).

Connection error occurred

between the “y-1”th unit (group “x-

1”) and “y”th unit (group “x”) of

channel “n”.

PC057 I/O Link I

SAFETY I/O ALARM


UNITy : “unit name” (Note 1)

-----------------------------------------

Change the I/O device of the unit. If

the error still occurs, change the

main board.

A hardware failure of the safety

I/O occurred between the CNC

and the “y”th unit.

PC058 I/O Link I

SLAVE LSI EXTERNAL ALARM

-----< ERROR POSITION>----------------

CHn / UNITy(GROUPx) : “Unit name”

(Note1)

---------------------------------------------------

Change the I/O device of the unit. A hardware failure occurred on

the “y”th unit (group “x”) of

channel “n”.

NOTE1 When an unknown unit is connected, the hardware ID is displayed.2 For some I/O devices, one unit such as a safety I/O unit may consist of two

groups. If a connection failure occurs between groups containing units of thesame type, PC058 instead of PC056 indicating a connection failure occurs as aunit failure.




- 157 -

15.3 Operation Errors

Error messages that may be disp layed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action

Contents

INPUT INVALID Input a valid address or numeric

value.

The input address or numeric value is

invalid.

LADDER PROGRAM IS

PROTECTED BY PASSWORD

Enter the password. The screen cannot be displayed

because the program is protected by

the password.

ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME Input a existent subprogram number

or symbol.

A nonexistent subprogram number or

symbol is specified.

SYMBOL UNDEFINED Input a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string

is specified.

THE NET IS NOT FOUND The specified net is not found.

THE ADDRESS IS NOT FOUND The specified address is not found.THE FUNCTIONAL

INSTRUCTION IS NOT FOUND

The specified functional instruction is

not found.

WRITE COIL NEEDS BIT

ADDRESS

Specify a bit address for the write coil

search.

You entered a byte address when

specifying an address used for the

write coil search.

SOME NETS ARE DISCARDED The system cannot pick up all the

nets. Choose the nets to pick up, by

using the LADDER DIAGRAM

VIEWER display screen, and then

perform the net pickup operation

manually.

The system failed to pick up all the

nets because there were 128 nets or

more to be picked up.

PROGRAM IS BEINGMODIFIED Disconnect the online communicationwith FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other

applications from accessing the

ladder data.

The ladder data cannot be displayedbecause online communication with

FANUC LADDER-III is in progress or

another application is accessing the

ladder data.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED

Cancel the protection by the

programmer protection function or 8-

level protection function.

This function is protected by the



CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION

BLOCK

Use FANUC LADDER-III to edit

function block.

You tried to edit the FB body

program.




- 158 -

Error messages that may be disp layed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAMEDITOR screen

Message Faulty location/cor rective action Contents

THIS NET IS PROTECTED When you are editing data on a per-

subprogram basis, you cannot editthe subprogram frame nets (END1,

END2, END3, SP, and SPE).

TOO LARGE DATA TO COPY Reduce the range of data to copy.

Perform the copy operation several

times, copying a smaller range of data

at a time.

The selected range of data exceeds

the size of the copy buffer.

TOO LARGE DATA TO PASTE Reduce the size of data to paste. An attempt was made to paste data

whose size exceeded the free space

of the sequence program.

BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address types

match for the alteration operation.

An attempt was made to alter a bit

address to a byte address.

BYTE ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Make sure that the address typesmatch for the alteration operation.

An attempt was made to alter a byteaddress to a bit address.

ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Check the address to be input, and

then enter it correctly.

• A character string was entered that

was unacceptable as a PMC

address.

• A wildcard (*) was specified in an

inappropriate manner.

• Either "OLD ADDRESS" or "NEW

ADDRESS" was not entered.

THIS ADDRESS IS READ-ONLY Enter a write-permitted address. • An attempt was made to alter a

write coil address to a write-

prohibited bit address.

• An attempt was made to alter an

address set in an output parameter

of a functional instruction to a write-

prohibited bit address.

THE ADDRESS TYPE ARE

MISMATCHED

Check the types of the address in

"OLD ADDRESS" and "NEW

ADDRESS" and, if necessary, enter

the correct address or addresses.

The type of the addresses in "OLD

ADDRESS" does not match that in

"NEW ADDRESS".

***** DOSE NOT HAVE SYMBOL Define symbol data in "OLD

ADDRESS".

No symbol data is defined for "OLD

ADDRESS".

***** ALREADY HAS SYMBOL Make sure that the address types

match for the alteration operation.

Symbol data is already defined for

"NEW ADDRESS".

CANNOT CUT FUNCTION

BLOCK


function block.

Cut nets which do not include any

function block.

You tried to cut the net including the

function block.

CANNOT COPY FUNCTION

BLOCK


function block.

Copy nets which do not include any

function block.

You tried to copy the net including the

function block.

CANNOT EDIT FUNCTION

BLOCK


function block.

You tried to edit the FB body

program.

CANNOT INPUT AT THIS

SCREEN

Use NET EDITOR screen. You tried to set an address in the

output section that is omitted in the

function block.

CANNOT EDIT INPUT/OUTPUTPARAM ADDRESS

An address in the input section of aninput/output parameter in the function

block cannot be changed.




- 159 -

Message Faulty location/cor rective action

Contents

NO CONSTANT TO

PARAMETER OF PLURAL

TYPE

When the input parameter of the

function block is plural data type, any

constant cannot be set.

Error messages that may be disp layed on the PMC LADDER DIAGRAMEDITOR screen (when updating)


OVERLAPPED COM If COME is missing, add it in proper

position. If the COM is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no COME that corresponds

to this COM.

END IN COM

END1 IN COM

END2 IN COM

If COME is missing, add it in proper

position. If COM is unnecessary,

remove it.

END,END1,END2, or END3 is found

between COM and COME.

JMPE IN COM JMPE and corresponding JMP must

have same COM/COME status. Review

JMP range and COM range, to adjustnot to overlap with each other: it is

possible that one range includes the

other completely.

JMPE is found between COM and

COME, and JMP and corresponding

JMPE have different COM/COMEstatus.

SP/SPE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper


remove it.

SP or SPE is found between COM

and COME.

COME WITHOUT COM If COM is missing, add it in proper

position. If the COME is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no COM that corresponds to

this COME.

COME NOT FOUND AFTER

COM

If COME is missing, add it in proper


remove it.

There is no COME that corresponds

to this COM.

DUPLICATE CTR NUMBER

(WARN)

If some of them are unnecessary,

remove them. If all of them are

necessary, assign other number to

parameter of them to make them

unique. (If two or more instructions with

same parameter number will never be

active simultaneously at one time, the

Ladder program has a possibility to work

correctly, however, it is recommended

from safety and maintenance points of

view, that all these instructions should

have different parameter number with

each other.)

Plural CTRs have the same number

as their parameter. (This is warning.)

ILLEGAL CTR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign

correct number not to exceed the

maximum number defined by each PMC

model.

CTR has parameter number that is

out of range.




- 160 -


Contents

DUPLICATE DIFU/DIFD

NUMBER

(WARN)













each other.)

Plural DIFUs or DIFDs have the same

number as their parameter. (This is

warning.)

ILLEGAL DIFU/DIFD NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign



model.

DIFU or DIFD has parameter number

that is out of range.

NO END

NO END1

NO END2

NO END3

Add END, END1, END2 or END3 in

proper position.

END, END1, END2 or END3 is not

found.

DUPLICATE END1

DUPLICATE END2

DUPLICATE END3

Remove extra END1, END2 or END3. Multiple END1, END2 or END3 are

found.

GARBAGE AFTER END

GARBAGE AFTER END2

GARBAGE AFTER END3

Remove unnecessary nets, and move

necessary nets to proper position so

that they will be executed.

There are some nets after END,

END2 or END3, which will not be

executed.

OVERLAPPED JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the JMP is unnecessary,remove it.

There is no JMPE that corresponds to

this JMP.

JMP/JMPE TO BAD COM

LEVEL

JMP and corresponding JMPE must

have same COM/COME status. Review

JMP range and COM range, to adjust

not to overlap with each other: it is

possible that one range includes the

other completely.

JMP and corresponding JMPE have

different COM/COME status.

COME IN JMP COME and corresponding COM must

have same JMP/JMPE status. Review

COM range and JMP range, to adjust

not to overlap with each other: it is

possible that one range includes theother completely.

COME is found between JMP and

JMPE, and COM and corresponding

COME have different JMP/JMPE

status.

END IN JMP

END1 IN JMP

END2 IN JMP

END3 IN JMP

If JMPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If JMP is unnecessary, remove

it.

END,END1,END2, or END3 is found

between JMP and JMPE.

SP/SPE IN JMP If JMPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the JMP is unnecessary,

remove it.

SP or SPE is found between JMP and

JMPE.

JMPB OVER COM BORDER JMPB and its destination must have

same COM/COME status. Review range

of JMPB and COM range, to adjust not

to overlap with each other: it is possible

that one range includes the other

completely.

JMPB and its destination differ in

COM/COME status.




- 161 -


Contents

JMPB OVER LEVEL JMPB can only jump to the same

program level, or within a subprogram. If

the JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If

LBL for the JMPB is missing, add it in

proper position. If it should be JMPC,

correct it.

JMPB jumps to different program

level.

LBL FOR JMPB NOT FOUND If JMPB is unnecessary, remove it. If

LBL is missing, add it in proper position.

Can not find proper LBL for JMPB.

JMPC IN BAD LEVEL JMPC is used to jump from a

subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is

unnecessary, remove it. If it should be

JMPB or JMP, correct it.

JMPC is used in other than

subprogram.

LBL FOR JMPC NOT FOUND If JMPC is unnecessary, remove it. If

LBL is missing, add it in proper position:

JMPC jumps into level 2.

Can not find proper LBL for JMPC.

LBL FOR JMPC IN BAD

LEVEL

JMPC is used to jump from a

subprogram to level 2. If the JMPC is

unnecessary, remove it. If another LBL

of same L-address that the JMPC is

intended to jump exists in the

subprogram, assign different L-address

to these two LBLs. If it should be JMPB

or JMP, correct it.

Destination of JMPC is not level 2.

JMPC INTO COM LBL for JMPC must be located out of

any COM and COME pair. If the JMPC

is unnecessary, remove it. If the LBL is

located wrong, move it to correct

position. If the L-address of JMPC is

wrong, correct it.

JMPC jumps to LBL between COM

and COME.

JMPE WITHOUT JMP If JMP is missing, add it in proper

position. If the JMPE is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no JMP that corresponds to

this JMPE.

JMPE NOT FOUND AFTER

JMP

If JMPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the JMP is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no JMPE that corresponds to

this JMP.

TOO MANY LBL Remove unnecessary LBLs. If this error

still occurs, adjust the construction of

program to use less LBLs.

There are too many LBLs.

DUPLICATE LBL If some of these LBLs are unnecessary,

remove them. If all of these LBLs is

necessary, assign other L-addresses tothem to make all LBLs unique.

Same L-address is used in plural

LBLs.

OVERLAPPED SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the SP is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no SPE that corresponds to

this SP.

SPE WITHOUT SP If SP is missing, add it in proper

position. If the SPE is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no SP that corresponds to

this SPE.

SPE NOT FOUND AFTER SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the SP is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no SPE that corresponds to

this SP.

END IN SP If SPE is missing, add it in proper

position. If END is in wrong place, move

it to proper position.

END is found between SP and SPE.




- 162 -


Contents

DUPLICATE P ADDRESS If some of these SPs are unnecessary,

remove them. If all of these SPs is

necessary, assign other P-addresses to

them to make all SPs unique.

Same P-address is used in plural

SPs.

DUPLICATE TMRB/TMRBF

NUMBER

(WARN)













each other.)

Plural TMRBs/TMRBFs have the

same number as their parameter.

(This is warning.)

ILLEGAL TMRB/TMRBF

NUMBER

If unnecessary, remove it. Assign



model.

TMRB/TMRBF has parameter

number that is out of range.

DUPLICATE TMR NUMBER

(WARN)








Ladder program has a possibility to workcorrectly, however, it is recommended




each other.)

Plural TMRs have the same number

as their parameter. (This is warning.)

ILLEGAL TMR NUMBER If unnecessary, remove it. Assign



model.

TMR has parameter number that is

out of range.

NO SUCH SUBPROGRAM If it calls wrong subprogram, correct it. If

the subprogram is missing, create it.

Subprogram that is called by

CALL/CALLU is not found.

UNAVAILABLEINSTRUCTION Confirm that this ladder program iscorrect one. If this program is correct

one, all these unsupported instructions

have to be removed.

Unsupported instruction for this PMCmodel is found.

SP IN BAD LEVEL SP can be used at top of a subprogram.

Correct it so that no SP exists in other

place.

SP is found in wrong place.

LADDER PROGRAM IS

BROKEN

This ladder program must be all cleared

once, and remake ladder program.

Ladder program may be broken by

some reason.

NO WRITE COIL Add proper write coil. Write coil is necessary, but is not

found.

CALL/CALLU IN BAD LEVEL CALL/CALLU must be used in Level 2

or in subprograms. Do not use any other

places.

CALL/CALLU is used in wrong place.




- 163 -


Contents

SP IN LEVEL3 If END3 is located wrong, move it to

correct position. If the SP is

unnecessary, remove it.

SP is found in level 3.

CS/CM/CE IN COM If COME is missing, add it in proper


remove it.

CS,CM or CE is found between COM

and COME.

CS/CM/CE IN BAD LEVEL CS, CM or CE must be used in Level 2

or in subprograms. Do not use any other

places.

CS,CM, or CE is used in wrong place.

CM/CE WITHOUT CS If CS is missing, add it in proper

position. If the CM or CE is

unnecessary, remove it.

There is no CS that corresponds to

this CM or CE.

INSTRUCTION EXCEPT CM

IN CS

If CE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the instruction other than CM

is unnecessary, remove it.

Instruction except CM is found

between CS and CE.

OVERLAPPED CS If CE is missing, add it in proper

position. If the CS is unnecessary,

remove it.

There is no CE that corresponds to

this CS.

FB BODY PROGRAM IS

BLOKEN

The ladder program must be deleted

and remake it.

FB body program is broken.

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC NET EDITOR screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action

Contents

ILLEGAL FUNCTIONAL

INSTRUCTION NAME

Specify the name of an available

functional instruction.

The entered name of functional

instruction is invalid.

TOO MANY FUNCTION IN

ONE NET

Only one functional instruction is

allowed to constitute a net. If necessary,

divide the net into plural nets.

Too many functional instructions are

in one net.

TOO LARGE NET Divide the net into plural nets so that

step number in a net may become

small.

Net is too large. When a net is

converted into the object, the net

exceeds 256 steps.

NO INPUT FOR OPERATION Coil without input, or coil connected to

output of functional instruction that has

no output, causes this error. If coil is not

necessary, remove it. If necessary,

connect it to meaningful input.

No signal is provided for logical

operation.

OPERATION AFTER

FUNCTION IS FORBIDDEN

Output of functional instruction can not

be connected to a contact, nor to

conjunction with other signal that will be

implemented by logical-or operation.

No logical operation with functional

instruction output is permitted, except

write coils.

WRITE COIL IS EXPECTED Write coil is not found even if it is

expected. Add proper write coil to the

net.

Write coil is expected, but not found.

BAD COIL LOCATION Coil can be located only at rightmost

column. Any coil located at other place

must be erased once, and place

necessary coils in correct place.

Coil is located in bad position.

SHORT CIRCUIT Find contact with terminals connected

by short circuit, and correct connections.

Some contacts are connected with

short circuit. CTR has a parameter

number that is out of the range.

FUNCTION AFTER

DIVERGENCE IS

FORBIDDEN

Functional instruction can not be used in

output section of net. If necessary,

divide the net into plural nets.

Functional instruction is used in

output section of net.




- 164 -


Contents

ALL COIL MUST HAVE SAME

INPUT

Left terminals of all coils in a net must

be connected to same input point.

When a net contains more than one

coil, the coils should not have any

contact beside them affects only of

the coils.

BAD CONDITION INPUT Check the connection of all condition

inputs of the functional instruction.

Especially for functional instruction that

has more than one condition input,

check if connections to condition inputs

interfere with each other.

Some condition input of functional

instruction is not connected correctly.

NO CONNECTION Correct the connection where is not

connected.

The elements ,such as contacts and

coils, are not connected..

NET IS TOO COMPLICATED Examine every connection, and find

unnecessarily bending connection, or

coils that are connected to different

point.

Net is too complicated to analyze.

PARAMETER IS NOT

SUPPLIED

Enter all of the relay addresses, and

parameters of functional instructions.

Relay with blank address, or blank

parameter of functional instruction, is

found.

TOO LARGE DATA FOR NET-

EDITOR

Change for being to modify net by

[NEXT NET] soft key.

The net data in net editor screen is

too large.

TOO MANY FUNCTIONS FOR

NET-EDITOR

Change for being to modify net by

[NEXT NET] soft key.

There are too many functional

instructions in net editor screen.

BAD DIAGRAM STRUCTURE Examine every connection, and find the

error of connection of relay or functional

instruction.

Circuit is too complicated to analyze.

NOT SUPPORT ENHANCED

LADDER DIAGRAM

Replace other functional instruction

which supports Structure of extended

type net.Or, change the ladder net construction

not to be Structure of extended type net.

The ladder net Structure of extended

type net contains a functional

instruction which does not supportStructure of extended type net.

TOO COMPLICATED

CIRCUIT

AROUND FUNCTION

The circuit lines branched from a

conditional input for some functional

instruction must reach the right power

line without joining the output line from

the functional instruction.

Refer to 8.3.4.3.

The circuit construction around

functional

instruction is too complicated.

CONNECT OUTPUT TO COIL

DIRECTLY

Connect the output of the functional

instruction directly to a coil.

The output of the functional

instruction is not

connected directly to a coil.

SINGLE COIL IS EXPECTED This functional instruction must havesingle coil directly connected to the

output.

A functional instruction has multiplecoils

connected to its output which are

prohibited.

INVALID CIRCUIT FOR FB

PARAMETER

Specify the name of contact and coil for

the parameter of function block.

The functional instruction is

connected to the parameter of

function block.

NO CONNECTION Connect the broken connection. The connection is broken.

PARAMETER IS NOT

SUPPLIED

Specify an address. The address is not assigned to the

input section and the coil of output

section of a function block.

CAN NOT PLACE FB AND

FUNCTION IN ONE NET

Delete the functional instruction placed

on the same net as the function block.

A functional instruction is placed on

the same net as the function block.NO ASSIGNMENT TO FB

CONTACT

Specify a contact. The contact is not assigned in the

input section for a BOOL type of the

function block.




- 165 -

Error messages that may be displayed on the TITLE DATA EDITOR screenMessage Faulty location/corrective action Contents

TOO MANY

CHARACTERS

Make sure that the entered character

string is within the allowable input length.

The number of characters in the entered

character string exceeds the allowableinput length. Some of the characters are

discarded.

PROGRAM IS BEING

MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication with

FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other

applications from accessing the title data.

The title data cannot be displayed

because online communication with


another application is accessing the title

data.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED

Cancel the protection by the programmer

protection function or 8-level protection

function.


programmer protection function or 8-level

protection function.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYMBOL & COMMENT DATAEDITOR screen

Message Faulty location/corrective action

Contents

TOO MANY

CHARACTERS

Make sure that the entered address is

within the allowable input length.

The number of characters in the entered

address exceeds the allowable address

input length.

ADDRESS IS

REQUIRED

Enter data in a batch correctly, as

instructed in "Editing a set of symbol and

comment data" in Subsection 9.2.2.

No address was entered during the batch

input of address, symbol, and comment

data using the SYMBOL & COMMENT

EDITOR screen.

ILLEGAL PMC

ADDRESS

Enter an address correctly. The specified address is invalid, or the

entered address character string

contains a space or spaces.THE ADDRESS

ALREADY HAS AN

ENTRY

Specify another address. An already registered address was

entered.

THE SYMBOL NAME IS

ALREADY USED

Specify another symbol. An already registered symbol was

entered.

PMC ADDRESS MUST

BE ENTERED

Enter a PMC address in the ADDRESS

field.

No PMC address was entered when new

symbol/comment data is registered.

TOO LONG SYMBOL

NAME

Make sure that the symbol consists of 16

characters or less.

The entered symbol exceeds the

specified number of characters.

TOO LONG COMMENT

STRING

Make sure that the comment consists of 30

characters or less.

The entered comment exceeds the

specified number of characters.

THE STRING IS NOTFOUND

Specify another character string for thesearch.

The search was done for the specifiedcharacter string but did not find it.

OUT OF SPACE Create free space for the sequence

program, by deleting unnecessary ladder

or message data.

The symbol/comment editing area has no

free space.

PROGRAM IS BEING

MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication with

FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other


symbol/comment data.

The symbol/comment data cannot be

displayed because online communication

with FANUC LADDER-III is in progress

or another application is accessing the

symbol/comment data.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED



function.


programmer protection function or 8-level

protection function.BAD SYMBOL NAME Change the symbol name. The symbol name is invalid.




- 166 -


Contents

CANNOT EDIT ADDRESS AUTO ASSIGNED SYMBOL

Use FANUC LADDER-III to change thesymbol.

The symbol whose PMC address isassigned automatically by compilingFANUC LADDER-III, can not edit.

ILLEGAL DATA TYPE Enter a correct data type. The specified data type is invalid.

ILLEGAL PROGRAMNAME

Enter a correct program name. The specified program is invalid.

LINE FEED IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THISDATA

Line feed code can be entered in commentdata only. Do not enter it in other data.

Line feed code cannot be entered in thisdata.

LINE FEED IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THISMODE

Enter Line feed code in the insert oroverwrite mode.

Line feed code cannot be entered in thismode.

NO SYMBOL.PROGRAM SETTING ISIGNORED

Symbol name is required for local symbol. The specified program is ignoredbecause no symbol is specified.

NOTHING TO PASTE You need to copy or cut character strings

before you paste them.

You try to paste character strings without

copying or cutting ones.

TOO LARGE DATA TO

PASTE

Shorten the character string to copy or cut. The character strings is too long to copy

or cut.

UNAVAILABLECHARACTERS WASOMITTED.

Do not copy or cut characters which

cannot be used at pasted position.

The characters which can not be used at

pasted position, were omitted.

Error messages that may be displayed on the MESSAGE DATA EDITORscreen


INPUT INVALID Correct the message number.

Enter ";" in the 5th digit position in the

batch message input process.

The format of the message number is

invalid, or the delimiter code -

semicolon (;) - was not entered in the

batch message input process.

ILLEGAL NUMBER Enter a four-digit number as the message

number.

The entered message number contains

any nonnumeric character, or a number

shorter than four digits was entered.

THE NUMBER IS OUT OF

RANGE

Enter the number in the range from 0 to

4095 for the message number of the

format with path number, and 1000 to

9999 for the message number of other

format.

The entered message number is out of

range.

CLOSING "@" IS NOT

FOUND

When entering kana or other Japanese

characters, make sure that they are

enclosed within a pair of @ signs.

One of the @ sign pair is missing.

BAD NUMBER OF

CHARACTERS IN "@-@"

Enter a character string correctly between

a pair of @ signs.

The number of characters entered

between the pair of @ signs is not even.

ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN

"@-@"

Enter a character string correctly between

a pair of @ signs.

One or more invalid character codes

exist between the pair of @ signs.

BAD NUMBER OF

CHARACTERS FOR 2-

BYTE CODE

Enter a two-byte code correctly between

@02 and 01@.

The number of characters in the two-

byte code (characters entered between

@02 and 01@) is not a multiple of four.

ILLEGAL 2-BYTE CODE Enter a two-byte code correctly between

@02 and 01@.

The two-byte code (characters entered

between @02 and 01@) contains one

or more characters other than the JIS

codes.

CLOSING CONTROL

CODE "01" IS NOT

FOUND

Enter the closing control code. The two-byte code (characters entered

between @02 and 01@) lacks the

closing control code (01).CONTROL CODE "XX" IS

REPEATED

Remove any repeated control code. The starting control code (02), closing

control code (01), and/or umlaut code

(0D) is repeated.




- 167 -


Contents

CLOSING "]" IS NOT

FOUND

Make sure that the "[" and "]" codes are

entered in pairs.

The delimiter codes for numerical data

are not entered in pairs.

BAD NUMERICAL DATA

FORMAT

Specify the numerical data correctly. The format of the numerical data is

invalid.

BAD PMC ADDRESS FOR

NUMERIAL DATA

Enter an available address. The address section of the numerical

data is invalid.

PROGRAM IS BEING

MODIFIED

Disconnect the online communication

with FANUC LADDER-III. Stop other

applications from accessing the message

data.

The message data cannot be displayed

because online communication with


another application is accessing the

message data.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED



function.




Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O MODULE EDITOR screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action

Contents

GROUP NUMBER IS TOO

LARGE

Specify 15 or a smaller value as the

group number.

The entered group number is too large.

BASE NUMBER IS TOO

LARGE

Specify base number 0 for I/O Unit-B (##,

#1 - #10).

The entered base number is too large.

SLOT NUMBER IS TOO

LARGE

Specify 30 or a smaller value as the slot

number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).

For other I/O units, specify 10 or a

smaller value.

The entered slot number is too large.

SLOT NUMBER IS TOO

SMALL

Specify 0 or a large value as the slot

number for I/O Unit-B (##, #1 - #10).

For other I/O units, specify 1 or a largervalue.

The entered slot number is too small.

I/O UNIT NAME

MISMATCH

Check the I/O unit name or address. The input I/O unit is assigned to the Y

address, or the output I/O unit is

assigned to the X address.

ILLEGAL I/O UNIT NAME Enter an I/O unit that is listed in Tables

3.2 (a) to 3.2 (c) in Chapter 3.

The entered I/O unit name is invalid.

NOT ENOUGH SPACE Enter the data again after creating free

space by deleting the data allocated

behind the current cursor position or by

other adequate means.

There is not enough free address space

for the size of the I/O unit you are going

to assign.

This error also occurs if you attempt to

assign the I/O unit to an already

allocated address space.

PROGRAM IS BEING

MODIFIED



applications from accessing the I/O

module data.

The I/O module data cannot be

displayed because online

communication with FANUC LADDER-

III is in progress or another application

is accessing the I/O module data.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED



function.







- 168 -

Error messages that may be displayed on the I/O CONFIGURATION EDITORscreen


TOO MANY GROUPS (CHx) Delete any unnecessary group, then

create a new group.

A new group cannot be created

because the maximum number ofgroups per channel is exceeded.

TOO MANY SLOTS (CHx) Delete any unnecessary slot, then

create a new slot.

A new slot cannot be created because

the maximum number of slots per

channel (256 slots) is exceeded.

TOO MANY SLOTS IN A

GROUP (CHx, Gyy)

Delete any unnecessary slot, then

create a new slot.

A new slot cannot be created because

the maximum number of slots per

channel (32 slots) is exceeded.

NO SLOT(Gxx) Add a slot. There is no slot in group Gxx.

SLOT NUMBER IS

REQUIRED

Enter a slot number. No slot number is entered for a slot.

SLOT NUMBER DUPLICATE Change the slot number used more

than once.

More than one slot data item having the

same slot number is found in the samegroup.

CAN NOT DELETE MPG

SLOT

Turn the MPG flag off in the group

setting screen.

No MPG slot can be deleted in the slot

setting screen.

ILLEGAL SLOT NUMBER Enter a slot number not greater than

32.

The entered slot number is greater than

32.

ILLEGAL PMC ADDRESS Enter a correct PMC address again. The entered PMC address is invalid.

Alternatively, no PMC address is

entered.

ILLEGAL SIZE Enter a correct size again. The entered size is outside the PMC

address range.

Alternatively, a value of 0 is entered as

the size.SLOT HAS NO ASSIGNMENT Enter a PMC address and size. For a slot, a PMC address or size is not

entered for both DI and DO.

ILLEGAL COMMENT Enter a correct comment again. An entered comment does not conform

to the extended symbol and comment

format.

PMC ADDRESS

OVERLAPPED (PMCm

X(Y)nnnn)

Enter the PMC address or size so that

it is set only once.

Address PMCm X(Y)nnnn is also

assigned to another slot in I/O Link i

assignment data.

TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS

(CHx, Gyy)

Reduce the number of output points of

the group.

The number of output points of the I/O

Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds

the upper limit (65 bytes by default or

29 bytes for the safety I/O device).

TOO MANY INPUT POINTS

(CHx, Gyy)

Reduce the number of input points of

the group.

The number of input points of the I/O

Link i group set for Gyy of CHx exceeds

the upper limit (65 bytes by default or

29 bytes for the safety I/O device).

TOO MANY OUTPUT POINTS

(CHx)

Reduce the number of output points in

the channel.

Warning message. The number of I/O

Link i output points set in CHx exceeds

the upper limit.

TOO MANY INPUT POINTS

(CHx)

Reduce the number of input points in

the channel.

Warning message. The number of I/O

Link i input points set in CHx exceeds

the upper limit.

TOO MANY CHARACTERS Enter a comment within the input field. The number of characters in an entered

comment exceeds the input width.

THE ADDRESS IS NOT

FOUND

The specified address is not found.

INPUT INVALID Enter a correct numeric value. A numeric value is invalid.




- 169 -


Contents

I/O CONFIG DATA IS

BROKEN

Enter an I/O configuration file again. I/O Link i assignment data is invalid.

TOO MANY SAFETY I/O

GROUPS

Reduce the number of I/O Link i

safety I/O groups.

Warning message. More than four I/O

Link i safety I/O groups are specified

either on the PMC or DCS side in the

entire system.

TOO MANY ASSIGNMENTS

(H.SPEED)(CHn,Gyy)

When a group in the high-speed

transfer cycle mode is connected to

I/O Link i, correct assignment so that

the assignment for each group is

performed within the quartered

transfer timing with referencing

Subsection 3.6.4 “Transfer Cycle”.

Warning message. In CHn, group yy

and following exceed the transfer

capacity limit in transfer timing

assignment processing when the high-

speed mode of I/O Link i is used.

BASIC GROUP INVALID Correct the number of basic groups

for the I/O assignment selection

function of I/O Link i.(0 to 24)

The number of basic groups for the I/O

assignment selection function of I/O

Link i is invalid.

UNAVAILABLE ADDRESS

FOR DCSPMC

Use addresses X0/Y0 and following. Addresses X200/Y200, X400/Y400, or

X600/Y600 and following are assigned

to a group for which DCSPMC is

specified for the PMC path.

THIS DATA IS BEING

MODIFIED



applications from accessing the I/O

configuration data.

I/O configuration data cannot be




is accessing the I/O configuration data.

INTERNAL

ERROR(0xCxxxxxxx)

Contact us, and report the displayed

message correctly.

This error occurs due to an internal

factor. An error code is indicated in

parentheses.

Error messages that may be displayed on the SYSTEM PARAMETER screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value correctly, as

instructed in Section 9.8.

The entered numerical value or its input

format is invalid.

SYMBOL UNDEFINED Enter a defined symbol or bit address. An undefined symbol character string

was entered.

PROGRAM IS BEING

MODIFIED




system parameter data.

The system parameter data cannot be




is accessing the system parameter

data.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED







Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL STATUS screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action

Contents


instructed in "Screen operations using

other keys" in Subsection 7.1.2.

The entered numerical value or its input

format is invalid.


was entered.THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED










- 170 -

Error messages that may be displayed on the PMC PARAM screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action Contents


instructed in Section 7.3.

The entered numerical value or its

input format is invalid.MUST BE IN EMERGENCYSTOP OR IN MDI MODE

Set a mode to MDI or emergencystop.

The status of NC is not MDI mode oremergency stop.

PWE MUST BE ON Set the “PWE” to ”1” in NC settingscreen.

The “PWE” in NC setting screenis ”0”.

EITHER PWE OR KEY4 MUSTBE ON

Set the “PWE” to ”1” in NC settingscreen or set the key “KEY4” to “1”.

The “PWE” in NC setting screen is ”0”or the program protect key “KEY4”is ”0”.

THIS FUNCTION IS

PROTECTED







Error messages that may be displayed on the SIGNAL TRACE screen


Contents

TRACE FUNCTION IS

ALREADY IN USE

Wait until FANUC LADDER-III or

some other application finishes using

the trace function before executing it.

FANUC LADDER-III or some other

application is currently using the trace

function.

NO SAMPLING ADDRESS Specify a bit address as a sampling

address in the trace parameter.

No sampling address is specified in

the trace parameter.

NO STOP TRIGGER ADDRESS Specify a bit address as the stop

trigger address in the trace

parameter.

The stop trigger address is not

specified in the trace parameter.

NO SAMPLING TRIGGER

ADDRESS

Specify a bit address as the sampling

trigger address in the trace

parameter.

The sampling trigger address is not

specified in the trace parameter.

USB MEMORY IS USED BYOTHER FUNCTION.

Terminate another function that isusing the USB memory, then perform

operation again.

The USB memory is being used byanother function.

USB MEMORY IS NOT READY. Check whether a USB memory is

inserted.

No USB memory is inserted.

USB MEMORY IS FULL. Delete any unnecessary files and

allocate a required capacity.

The USB memory is full.

USB MEMORY HAS BEEN

REMOVED

Insert the USB memory, then execute

input/output operation again.

A USB memory is removed while it is

being accessed.

USB MEMORY IS NOT

FORMATTED

Replace the USB memory with

another one.

The inserted USB memory cannot be

recognized.

USB HARDWARE ERROR

(xxxxxxxxxx)


another one. If this error still occursafter replacement, contact us, and

report the displayed message

correctly.

This error occurs due to a USB

hardware failure. An error code isindicated in parentheses.

INTERNAL ERROR (xxxxxxxxxx) Contact us, and report the displayed

message correctly.



parentheses.




- 171 -

Error messages that may be displayed on the trace setting screenMessage Faulty location/cor rective action Contents

INPUT INVALID Enter a numerical value that is within

the specified data range of the

relevant trace parameter.

A nonnumeric value or an out-of-

range parameter value was entered.


was entered.

BIT ADDRESS IS REQUIRED Specify a bit address as the stop or

sampling trigger address.

A byte address was specified as the

stop or sampling trigger address.

INVALID STOP TRIGGER

ADDRESS

Enter a PMC signal address that can

be used as the stop trigger address.

The bit address entered as the stop

trigger address is invalid.

INVALID SAMPLING TRIGGER

ADDRESS

Enter a PMC signal address that can

be used as the sampling trigger

address.

The bit address entered as the

sampling trigger address is invalid.

UNSUPPORTED TRACE

SETTING FILE

This file cannot be handled. Set data

in the TRACE SETING screen.

Unsupported trace setting file was

read.

INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINEn) Output the trance setting file again. Alternatively, set data in the TRACE

SETING screen.

An invalid setting was found.The file may be broken.

SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS

ADJUSTED

Check the data on the TRACE

SETING screen.

The values were adjusted according

to the read data. (This is warning.)

UNKNOWN SETTING WAS

SKIPPED(LINE n)

Check the read trace data. An unknown trace setting item was

found and ignored. (This is warning.)

INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS

WAS FOUND

Check the read trace data. An invalid sampling address was

found. (This is warning.)

TOO MANY SAMPLING

ADDRESSES

Check the read trace data. The number of sampling addresses

exceeds the upper limit. (This is

warning.)

THE FILE IS NOT TRACE

SETTING FILE

This file cannot be read. Specify a

correct file.

An attempt was made to read a file

which was not a trace setting file.

FILE NAME CONTAINS

RESERVED WORD.

Correct file name. “FORFANUC” cannot be used in the

top of the file name.

USB MEMORY IS USED BY

OTHER FUNCTION.

Terminate another function that is

using the USB memory, then perform

operation again.

The USB memory is being used by

another function.

Another function is formatting the

USB memory.


inserted.


USB MEMORY HAS BEEN

REMOVED

Insert the USB memory, then execute

input/output operation again.

A USB memory is removed while it is

being accessed.

USB MEMORY IS NOT

FORMATTED


another one.

The inserted USB memory cannot be

recognized.

FILE NAME IS INVALID. Correct the file name. An invalid character was found in a

file name.

FOLDER NAME CANNOT BE

SPECIFIED.

A folder name is specified. Specify an

appropriate file name.

An attempt was made to read or write

a folder.

USB HARDWARE ERROR

(xxxxxxxxxx)


another one. If this error still occurs

after replacement, contact the

FANUC service center, and report the

displayed message correctly.


hardware failure. An error code is

indicated in parentheses.


message correctly.



parentheses.




- 172 -

Error messages that may be disp layed on the I/O Diagnosis screenMessage Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ENTER STRING TO SEARCH. Enter a string before starting asearch.

No search string is specified.

I/O DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION IS NOT

SUPPORTED

To use the I/O diagnosis function,

update the PMC system software.

The I/O diagnosis function cannot

be used because the PMC systemsoftware is an older version.

INPUT INVALID Check the entered string. The entered string is invalid.

LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN Check the information displayed onthe PMC alarm screen and reloadthe program.

The program is broken.

NO GROUP FORMAT. Use [GROUP] on the I/O diagnosis(setting) screen.

No group display is set.

PROGRAM IS BEING MODIFIED. Retry after completing the functionthat is using the program.

The program cannot be referencedbecause it is being used by anotherfunction.

REACHED TO THE END OFSYMBOL DATA.

To make another search, specify astring again.

The search has been completeduntil the end of the data has beenreached.

SYMBOL ORDER IS NOT AVAILABLE.

Use the FANUC LADDER-III toconvert the program to one with theextended symbol & commentfunction.

The format of this program does notallow sorting and display in symbolorder.

THE GROUP IS NOT FOUND Check the specified group. The specified group is not found.

FORCING IS PROTECTED ONTHIS PATH.

Disable the programmer protection

function.

The forced input/output function is

currently protected on the selected

PMC path.

THE STRING IS NOT FOUND Check the specified string. The specified string is not found.

15.4 I/O Communication Error Messages

The error messages that may appear on the I/O screen and their meanings and actions are listed below.

Error messages displayed during memory card I/O operationMessage Faulty location/corrective action Contents

MEMORY CARD IS NOT

READY

Check whether a memory card is

installed.

No memory card is installed.

MEMORYCARD IS FULL Delete files to create available space. There is no available space in the

memory card.

MEMORYCARD IS WRITE

PROTECTED

Release the write protection of the

memory card.

The memory card is write-protected.

MEMORYCARD IS NOT

FORMATTED

Format the memory card. The memory card cannot be

recognized.TOO MANY FILES IN

MEMORYCARD

Delete unnecessary files to reduce the

number of files.

There are too many files.

FILE NOT FOUND On the list screen, check the file name

or file number.

The specified file cannot be found.

FILE IS READ-ONLY Check the attributes of the file. Write to the specified file is not

permitted.

FILE NAME IS INVALID Specify the file name in MS-DOS form. The file name is illegal.

COULD NOT FORMAT

MEMORY CARD

The NC cannot format this memory

card. Use another unit such as a

personal computer to format the

memory card.

The memory card cannot be

formatted.

UNSUPPORTEDMEMORYCARD

Replace the memory card with anotherone.

This memory card is not supported.

CAN NOT DELETE FILE Check the attributes of the file. An error occurred when a file was

deleted from the memory card.




- 173 -


Contents

MEMORYCARD BATTERY

ALARM

Replace the battery of the memory

card.

The battery of the memory card has

become weak.

THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY

USED

Change the file name to another one. The file name is already used.

MEMORYCARD ACCESS

ERROR

Replace the memory card with another

one.

The memory card cannot be

accessed.

DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a

mismatch.

MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED BY

OTHER FUNCTION

Wait until the PMC user completes

processing, then retry.

Another PMC user is using the

memory card.

MEMORY CARD HEADER ROM

DATA ID IS ILLEGAL

This file cannot be read. Check the

type of the file.

An attempt was made to read a file,

but its ROM data ID was illegal.

FILE NUMBER CAN NOT

SELECTED

If the file does not exist, the key entry is

invalid. If this error occurs even when

the cursor is placed at a file name,

contact the FANUC service center.

The file number cannot be selected.

THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT

EXIST

Check the total number of files on the

list screen.

The entered file number is not

present. The entered number

exceeds the total number of files.

FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED

TO "128"

Enter a numeric value not exceeding

128.

A value up to 128 can be entered as

the file number.

MEMORY CARD IS USED BY

OTHER FUNCTION

Retry after terminating the other

function that is currently using the

memory card.

Some other function is currently

using the memory card.

MEMORY CARD IS WRITE

PROTECTED

Cancel the write protection of the

memory card, or use another memory

card that is not write protected.

The memory card is write protected.

UNSUPPORTED MEMORY

CARD

Use another memory card. This is an unsupported type of

memory card.

COULD NOT DELETE FILE Check the read/write permission

attribute of the file.

The file cannot be deleted.

TRACE FILE NUMBER IS OVER Delete unnecessary old trace result file

or files.

No more trace result file can be

created because the maximum trace

result file number (file extension)

has been reached.

UNSUPPORTED TRACE

SETTING FILE

This file is Invalid. Set data in the

TRACE SETING screen.

Unsupported trace setting file was

read.

INVALID SETTING VALUE (LINE

n)

Output the trance setting file again.

Alternatively, set data in the TRACE

SETING screen.

Invalid setting value was found.

The file may be broken.

SAMPLING TIME/FRAME WAS ADJUSTED

Check the data on trace setting screen. It was adjusted according to thecontents. (This is warning.)

UNKNOWN SETTING WAS

SKIPPED(LINE n)

Check the read trace data. An unknown trace setting item was

found and ignored. (This is warning.)

INVALID SAMPLING ADDRESS

WAS FOUND

Check the read trace data. An invalid sampling address was

found. (This is warning.)

TOO MANY SAMPLING

ADDRESSES

Check the read trace data. The number of sampling addresses

exceeds the upper limit. (This is

warning.)


message correctly.

An error due to an internal factor

occurred. Details on the error are

displayed in parentheses.




- 174 -

Error messages displayed dur ing USB memory I/O operationMessage Faulty location/cor rective action Contents

FILE NAME CONTAINS

RESERVED WORD.

Correct file name. The string “FORFANUC” cannot be

used in the top of the file name.

USB MEMORY HAS BEENREMOVED

Insert the USB memory, then executeinput/output operation again.

A USB memory is removed while itis being accessed.


inserted.


USB MEMORY IS USED BY

OTHER FUNCTION.


using the USB memory, then perform

operation again.

The USB memory is being used by

another function.

THIS FILE NAME IS ALREADY

USED. OVERWRITE IT?

Follow the message, and overwrite

the file or specify another file name to

write data.

An existing file name is specified as

the write destination.

FILE NOT FOUND Check the file name or number on the

file list screen.

The specified file was not found.

USB MEMORY IS FULL. Delete any unnecessary files andallocate a required capacity. The USB memory is full.

FILE IS READ-ONLY. Specify another file or check the file

attribute and delete the read-only

attribute.

The specified file is read-only.

USB MEMORY IS NOT

FORMATTED


another one.

The inserted USB memory cannot

be recognized.

FILE NAME IS INVALID. Correct the file name. An invalid character was found in a

file name.

DIFFERENCE FOUND File comparison detected a

mismatch.

THE FILE NUMBER DOES NOT

EXIST

Check the total number of files on the

list screen.

The entered file number is not

found. The entered number is

greater than the total number of

files.

FILE NUMBER IS RESTRICTED

TO "128"

Enter a numeric value not greater

than 128.

A value up to 128 can be entered as

the file number.

FOLDER CANNOT BE

SPECIFIED.

<1> The specified number indicates a

folder. Enter an appropriate

number.

<2> No folder can be selected in the

file list screen.

<1> The specified number indicates

a folder.

<2> An attempt was made to select

a folder in the file list screen.

THIS FILE CANNOT BE

SPECIFIED.

<1> The file name corresponding to

the specified file number consists of

more than 32 characters. Enter an

appropriate number.

<2> No file having a file name

consisting of more than 32

characters can be selected in the

file list screen.

<1> The file name corresponding to

the specified file number consists

of more than 32 characters.

<2> An attempt was made to select

a file having a file name consisting

of more than 32 characters.

USB HARDWARE ERROR

(xxxxxxxxxx)


another one. If this error still occurs

after replacement, contact us, and

report the displayed message

correctly.


hardware failure. An error code is

indicated in parentheses.


message correctly.


factor. An error code is indicated inparentheses.




- 175 -

Error messages displayed during flash ROM I/O operationMessage Faulty location/cor rective action Contents

NOT IN EMG STOP MODE Place the system in the emergency

stop state.

The system is not in the emergency

stop state.

INVALID SEQUENCEPROGRAM

Check the program. The transfer program is illegal.

DIFFERENCE FOUND A file comparison detected a

mismatch.

FLASH ROM IS LOCKED BY

OTHER FUNCTION

Wait until the PMC user completes

processing, then retry.

Another PMC user is using the flash

ROM.

FLASH ROM HEADER ROM

DATA ID IS ILLEGAL

This file cannot be read. Check the

type of the file.

An attempt was made to read a file,

but its ROM data ID was illegal.

FLASH ROM IS USED BY

OTHER FUNCTION

Retry after ending another function

that uses flash ROM.

Flash ROM is in use by another

function.


message correctly.

An error due to an internal factor

occurred. Details on the error are

displayed in parentheses.

Error messages disp layed during FLOPPY or other input /output device I/Ooperation.


Contents

ILLEGAL PMC PARAMETER

FORMAT

Specify a file of the PMC parameter

format. Also, check the specified file

to see whether its content is not

disrupted.

The specified file is not of the PMC

parameter format.

ILLEGAL HANDY FILE FORMAT Specify a file of the handy file format.

Also, check the specified file to see

whether its content is not disrupted.

The specified file is not of the handy

file format.

UNKNOWN FILE FORMAT Specify file of recognizable format

such as PMC parameter format, or

check the contents of the file.

Cannot recognize the format of

specified file.

FILE NAME OR FILE NUMBER

IS REQUIRED

Specify file name or file number for

the operation.

Need file name or file number to

identify file to read, compare, or

delete.

COMMUNICATION TIMEOUT Check the communication parameters

such as baud rate, and retry to

communicate.

Communication with the I/O device

has been timeout.

I/O DEVICE IS NOT ATTACHED

OR IN ERROR STATUS

Check the power of I/O device is ON.

Check the I/O device is connected.

Check the cable that connects I/O

device with PMC is correct one. Ifsome error has occurred in I/O

device, solve it.

Any I/O device is not connected, or

some error has occurred in it.

RECEIVED BAD DATA: CHECK

THE COMMUNICATION

PARAMETERS

Check the PMC's communication

parameters such as baud rate match

the ones of I/O device.

Invalid data has been received.

RECEIVED DATA HAS

OVERRUN

Check the communication parameters

about flow control.

Too many data have received at

once.

OTHERS FUNCTION IS USING

THIS CHANNEL

Use the other channel, or stop the

function.

Others function is using this channel.

BAD COMMUNICATION

PARAMETER

Check the communication parameters

such as baud rate.

Setting parameters of communication

are not correct.

OTHER FUNCTION IS USINGI/O FUNCTION

Wait until function that using I/Ofunction do finish, or stop the function.

Another function such as FANUCLADDER-III is using I/O function.




- 176 -


Contents

UNKNOWN HANDY FILE

FORMAT DATA

Check the file. The received data is not a program of

the PMC system or is a program of

some other incompatible type.

ILLEGAL BAUD RATE SETTING Set a valid baud rate. The set baud rate is invalid.

ILLEGAL CHANNEL NUMBER Set a valid channel number. The set channel number is invalid.

ILLEGAL PARITY BIT SETTING Set a valid parity bit. The set parity bit is invalid.

ILLEGAL STOP BIT SETTING Set a valid stop bit. The set stop bit is invalid.

ILLEGAL WRITE CODE

SETTING

Set a valid output code. The set output code is invalid.

SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS IN

USE BY ONLINE FUNCTION

Wait until On-line function, do finish

the using I/O function. In general,

both of I/O function and On-line

function should not be used at the

same time.

Can not input/output of sequence

program, because On-line function is

using sequence program.

Common error messages that may be displayed on individual devices duringthe I/O operationsMessage Faulty location/corrective action Contents

ERROR OCCURS IN

SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Check the PMC alarm screen and

correct the indicated program error

accordingly.

Data cannot be output because there

is an error in the ladder program.

UNKNOWN DATA TYPE Check the file. The PMC type of the input data is

unknown.

MUST BE IN EMERGENCY

STOP

Set to emergency stop. The status of NC is not emergencystop when reading PMC parameter.

PWE MUST BE ON Set the “PWE” to ”1” in NC settingscreen.

The “PWE” in NC setting screen is ”0”when reading PMC parameter.

MUST BE IN EDIT MODE Set to the EDIT mode. The mode is not EDIT when readingPMC parameter.

THIS FUNCTION IS NOT

ALLOWED

Check the related settings. There are not all the settings that are

needed to use this function.

PMC PARAMETER IS LOCKED

BY OTHER FUNCTION



PMC parameter.

The PMC parameter is currently used

by some other function and cannot be

referenced by this function.

THIS DEVICE IS USED BY

OTHER FUNCTION



specified device.

The specified device is currently used


used by this function.

PMC PARAMETER IS

PROTECTED BY OTHER

FUNCTION



PMC parameter.

The PMC parameter is currently used


changed by this function.

LADDER TYPE UNMATCH Specify a program of a valid type. The specified program is of a different

type and cannot be read.

TOO LARGE SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

Check the file. Or, change to a step

number option that allows you to set a


The ladder program is too large to

read.

SEQUENCE PROGRAM IS

USED BY OTHER FUNCTION


function that is currently displaying

the ladder program.

The ladder program is currently used


referenced by this function.

INVALID I/O CONFIGURATION

DATA

Read correct I/O configuration file. Invalid I/O configuration data was

read and any of the following

operations was performed:

- Writing it to the memory card

- Comparing it with a memory card fileUSB

- Writing it to flash ROM

-Comparing it with flash ROM




- 177 -


Contents

TOO LARGE I/O

CONFIGURATION DATA

Check the I/O configuration file. The I/O configuration file is too large

to read.

I/O CONFIGURATION DATA IS

USED BY OTHER FUNCTION


using the I/O configuration data, then

execute operation again.

I/O configuration data is being used

by another function (such as FANUC

LADDER-III).





APPENDIX





B-85314EN-1/01 APPENDIX

A. CUSTOM PMC EDITINGWITH FANUC LADDER-III

A CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUCLADDER-III

On the personal computer, custom PMC editing can be performed using the programming system forsequence program development FANUC LADDER-III.

For the method of operating FANUC LADDER-III, refer to the following manual:FANUC LADDER-III Operator’s Manual (B-66234EN)

Use the procedure below when performing custom PMC editing with FANUC LADDER-III.

(1) Backup of a ladder programFrom the ROBODRILL, back up a ladder program (PMC2) to be edited.

(2) File conversion/decompilation (MEM file→

LAD file)Convert the backed-up ladder program to a file that can be edited using FANUC LADDER-III.(3) Editing

Edit the ladder program, message data, and so forth.

(4) Compilation/file conversion (LAD file → MEM file)Compile the edited ladder program and convert it to a file that can be loaded into the ROBODRILL.

(5) Loading of the ladder programLoad the ladder program to the ROBODRILL by using a memory card or Handy File.

(When using the multi-language display function, see Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAYFUNCTION".)

CAUTION• FANUC LADDER-III ver. 6.30 or later is required.

• To edit custom PMC for the ROBODRILL using FANUC LADDER-III, set

"exparam" in the %%%FLSET file in the folder in which FANUC LADDER-III hasbeen installed to "1".

[%%%FLSET file]

;=================================================; FANUC LADDER-III Initial Setting File; ( `key word =' <= 9 characters )

;=================================================;*V; ====== System information ======;…

exparam = 1; Set "1" ;*M; === Mnemonic options definition ===…

- 181 -



APPENDIX B-85314EN-1/01


On the system parameter setting screen of FANUC LADDER-III, confirm that "2 Channel" is checked in"Selectable I/O Link Assignment".

A.1 CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE

(1) Back up the ladder program of the ROBODRILL from the machine. (See Chapter 11.)(2) Copy the backed up ladder program onto the hard disk of the personal computer.

(Example: Copy the ladder program into the C:\PMC folder.)(3) Activate FANUC LADDER-III.

- 182 -





(4) Select [File]→ [Open].The Open File window appears.Set [Files of type] to [All Files (*.*)].Select the backed up ladder program.

Click the [Open] button.

The following window appears. Click the [OK] button.

(5) Enter the name of a ladder program to be created. (Example: PMC2.LAD)

Select 31i-B PMC for [PMC Type].Upon completion of setting, click the [OK] button.

- 183 -





(6) The following window appears. Click the [OK] button.

(7) The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.

(8) Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion of decompilation, the decompilation window isautomatically closed to display the screen below. (Ignore warning W-4105.)

- 184 -





A.2 LADDER PROGRAM EDITING

For the method of operation, refer to "FANUC LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)." Notes and tips on editing are provided below.

A.2.1 Title Editing

The items "Program Designed By", "ROM Written By", and "Remarks" may be used freely.Do not edit the other items.(The screen below provides an example of data set by FANUC at the time of shipment.)

- 185 -





A.2.2 Ladder Editing

• Create a ladder program by using P1500 (CUSTOM) as the main program.

• Subprograms may be added freely. (P1501 to P5000 may be used.)

- 186 -





A.2.3 Symbol and Comment Editing

• Symbols and comments can be freely added to any addresses.(On the PMC2 ladder editing/reference screen and signal status screen, set symbols and comments

are displayed. However, on the screens common to PMC1 and PMC2 such as the parameter screen,symbols and comments of PMC1 are used.)

- 187 -





A.2.4 Message Editing

• Do not add messages to addresses other than the specified addresses (A100.0 to A149.7).

• The table below indicates the usable alarms and operator messages.

Alarm 1900 to 1999

Operator message 2060 to 2099

[When the multi-language display function is not used]

• Messages set here are displayed without modification. When switching the display language, seeAppendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES".

[When the multi-language display function is used]

• See Appendix D, "MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION".

- 188 -





A.2.5 I/O Module Editing

• When the standard settings are used, no modification is needed.

• Before making additions or modifications to addresses for CH2 (X200-X327/Y200-Y327), fully

understand the specifications to assign the addresses correctly.• I/O Link i has been adopted as an I/O link. When you change the settings, refer to Section 9.10,

"DISPLAYING AND EDITING I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT " in "PMC Programming Manual (B-

64513EN)" or Chapter 15, "CREATION OF I/O Link i ASSIGNMENT DATA" in "FANUC

LADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234EN)".

A.2.6 System Parameter Edit ing

• You need not edit system parameters usually.

• For the method of switching the comment display according to the display language when a ladderdiagram is displayed on the machine screen, see Appendix C, "CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM

COMMENT SWITCHING PROCEDURE".

- 189 -





A.3 LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND LOADING FILECREATION

(1) Select [Tool]→ [Compile].The Compile window appears. Select the [Option1-2] tab.

Check the items below as needed then click the [Exec] button:• Output Symbol/Comment

• Output First Comment to Output Fourth Comment

• Output Netcomment pointers

• Multiple use check of Function parameter number

• Multiple use check of the symbol address

• Output warning in detail

- 190 -





(2) Check that the error count is 0, then click the [Close] button.

(3) Select [File]→ [Export].The Export window appears.Select the file type according to the installation mode of the ladder program.For a memory card: [Memory-card Format File]For a Handy File: [Handy-file Format File]

After selecting the file type, click the [Next >] button.

- 191 -





(4) Specify the file name of the ladder program to be installed.

After specifying the file name, click the [Finish] button.

(5) When data conversion is complete, the following message appears. Click the [OK] button.

(6) Copy the loading file onto a floppy disk or memory card, then install the file on the ROBODRILL.(See Chapter 11.)

- 192 -





A.4 CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION

When creating a custom ladder program with this series by using a custom ladder program created in the past, note the following:

• This series differs in the PMC configuration. So, ladder programs created with the old model mustnot be installed without modification.

• Even a ladder program created according to the PMC configuration of the new series may notoperate normally when newly added interface signals are used, if the system ladder program versionis earlier. Check whether the interface signals used are usable.

The system ladder program number/version information can be checked on the followingscreens:

PMC: Title data screen NC: System configuration screen

When a custom ladder program that was created with the old model and has a different programnumber/version is to be used with this system, extract only necessary portions to create a new secondPMC ladder program.

An example of procedure for creating a custom ladder program usable with this system by using FANUCLADDER-III (Version 6.30) from a custom ladder program created with an old ROBODRILL model isdescribed below.

- 193 -





(1) Open a ladder program created in the past.

Select [File] → [Open File].

Select a saved LAD file or MEM file.When an LAD file is selected, the program list display window is opened. (Proceed to (2).)When a MEM file is selected, the message below is displayed. Click [OK].

- 194 -





A window for creating a new ladder program is displayed. Enter a desired program name then click[OK].

The message below is displayed. Click [OK].

Click [OK] without entering the password.

Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automaticallyclosed. (Ignore warning W-4105 if output.)

- 195 -





(2) The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.

(3) Open a new ladder program to be created. (At the same time, start another FANUC LADDER-III.)By using the same procedure as described in (1), open a MEM format ladder program backed upfrom the machine of this series.

- 196 -





Enter the program name and specify "31i-B PMC" in PMC Type then click [OK].

The message below is displayed. Click [OK].

The window below is displayed. Click the [OK] button without entering the password.

- 197 -





Decompilation is executed. Upon normal completion, the decompilation window is automaticallyclosed.The following screen is displayed when decompilation is terminated normally.

- 198 -





(4) Copy the ladder program.Open subprogram P1500 of the custom ladder program created previously and select the portion

between SUB71 and SUB72 (not including SUB71 and SUB72) then select [Edit]→ [Copy].(Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Copy].)

- 199 -





Open P1500 of the ladder program to be created newly then move the cursor to the net of SUB72.

- 200 -





Select [Edit] → [Paste].(Alternatively, click the right-mouse button then select [Paste].)

This completes the copying of the ladder program.The symbols and comments used in the ladder program are also copied.

(5) Connecting messagesSee Appendix A.5, "EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES".

(6) Connecting symbols and commentsIf necessary symbols and comments are not copied together with the ladder program, create amnemonic file containing the symbols and comments from the custom ladder program created

previously.

- 201 -







Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program.

Select [Tool] → [Source Program Conversion].

When only necessary symbols and comments are to be added, "Initialize the following data beforeconversion" need not be checked.(When initializing symbol and comment data, uncheck "Ladder".)

(7) Convert X and Y addresses.The X and Y addresses may have been changed with each series.Convert the X and Y addresses to addresses usable with this series according to Chapter 5,"INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS".

To use the address replacement function, move the cursor to an address to be replaced then select

[Edit] → [Replace]. The window below is displayed. Enter an address before replacement in"Search string" and set an address after replacement in "Replace string" then click [Replace].

- 203 -





If addresses to be replaced are contiguous, select [Edit] → [Multi-replace...]. The window below isdisplayed. Set the start address of addresses before replacement and the start address of addressesafter replacement with [New Data] then click [Exec]. Those addresses are replaced in a batch.

- 204 -





A.5 EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES

When the PMC message multi-language display function is not used, edit messages on the messageediting screen only.

Create messages according to the descriptions below.

A.5.1 Ladder Program Message Edit ing

Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.

The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator messagenumbers, and A addresses.

Alarm 1900 to 1999

Operator message 2060 to 2099 A address A100.0 to A149.7

- 205 -





Add necessary messages.

To switch the message display language without using the multi-language display function, switch themessage by using a ladder program and the interface signals described in Section 12.23. An example of

program is provided below.

* To switch the message by using this method, the power must be turned off then back on afterswitching the display language.

- 206 -





To use messages created previously, open the ladder program previously created then select [Tool] → [Mnemonic Conversion].Set Mnemonic File (arbitrary), Convert Data (Message), and Selection Item (Full Options) then click[OK].

Open a mnemonic file containing the created messages with a text editor and leave only those messagesthat are used with the custom ladder program then save the file. (Delete those unnecessary messages thatare used with the system.)

- 207 -




- 208 -


Incorporate the edited file into the new ladder program.

Select [Tool] → [Source Program Conversion].

Set the mnemonic file name then click [OK] to incorporate the message data.




B. FORCED INPUT/OUTPUTFUNCTION

B FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

B.1 OVERVIEW

This function can forcibly enter a value for the signal of an arbitrary PMC address. With this function, for

example, an X value can be forcibly entered to enable sequence program debugging without using a

machine, and a Y value can be forcibly entered to enable the signal wiring on the machine to be checked

efficiently without using a sequence program.

There are the following two input modes: Forced input/output mode and override mode. Use either of

these modes according to your purpose. This function is added to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.

(1) Forced input/output mode

This mode is applied to all PMC addresses.

However, signals changed by the forced input/output are overwritten when values written or input by a sequence program are scanned, and therefore the changes made by the forced input/output are

lost.

Machine

Ladderprogram

X,Y

G,F,R,T,K,C,D,E

I/O addressesOverwrite

Overwrite

Overwrite

Example 1:

When forced input/output is applied to R0 in the following ladder program

MOVE 1111

1111

K0

R0

X0.0

(a) The initial signal status is as follows:

X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = 00H

(b) A value of FFH is forcibly input to R0.

X0.0 = off, K0 = 55H, R0 = FFH

(c) When X0.0 is turned on, R0 indicates the result of input from the sequence program.X0.0 = on, K0 = 55H, R0 = 55H

- 209 -





Example 2:

When forced input is applied to X0 in a configuration where I/O Unit-MODEL A is connected

to X0 over an I/O Link

The input value from I/O Unit-MODEL A is transferred to X0 at certain intervals. So, even if

the value of X0 is forcibly modified, X0 is overwritten in the next cycle. Thus, the value of

X0 is restored to the value input from I/O Unit-MODEL A.

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

X0 = FFh X0 = FFh

X0 = 00h

The forcibly modified value isoverwritten with the input from themachine.

I/O Unit-MODEL A

X0 = FFh

1. Input from the machine

2. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.

3.Input from the machine in the next cycle

NC

X0 = FFh

Cyclical transfer may also be performed for addresses that are not assigned. So, use the

forced input/output function for X in the forced input/output mode to debug a sequence program when no I/O device is connected or assigned.

When an I/O device is connected, use the override function described below to debug a

sequence program.

- 210 -





(2) OVERRIDE mode

The state in which values modified by the forced input/output function cannot be overwritten by a

sequence program or machine signals is referred to as override. In the override mode, override can

be set for any X and Y signals. Forced input/output is applied to those X and Y addresses where

override is not set, and also to addresses other than X and Y.

Example:

In this example, the forced input/output function is applied to X0 in a configuration where the

I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to X0 with an I/O link.

I/O Unit-MODEL A

X0 = FFh X0 = FFh

3. The value of X0 is forcibly modified to 00h.

I/O Unit-MODEL A

X0 = FFh X0 = 00h

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

X0 = FFh

The value transferred from I/OUnit-MODEL A is invalidated.

×

×

NC

NC

X0 = FFh

1. Input from the machine

2. Override is set for X0.

Thus, the forced input function can be used for X addresses in the override mode to debug a

sequence program while an I/O device is connected. When a Y address is placed in the

override state, a value that has been forcibly modified by forced input/output is output to the

I/O device.

- 211 -





CAUTION

1. In OVERRIDE mode, input/output signals are updated at 8-ms intervals in syncwith the ladder level. When an I/O link is used which is usually updated at 2-msintervals, an input/output signal timing delay occurs. For this reason, note that asequence that depends on input/output signal timing may perform anunpredictable operation.

2. Note that, when OVERRIDE mode is set, the interval of the second level may beextended slightly.

3. Even if override is set for a Y address, the resultant value of a ladder operationbefore modified by forced input/output is displayed as the coil on/off value inLADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen. A value after modified by the forcedinput/output function is output to the I/O device. Note that the on/off indicationon the LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR screen does not match a value output tothe I/O device.

Example:In this example, the forced input/output function is used for Y0.0 in the ladderbelow in a onfiguration where the I/O UNIT-MODEL A is connected to Y0 withan I/O link. Before OVERRIDE setting, the on/off indication in dynamic displaymatches a value output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shown below

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

X0.0 Y0.0

(off) (off)Y0.0=off

(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)

If 1 is entered forcibly after setting OVERRIDE for Y0.0, the value modified bythe forced input/output function is output to the I/O UNIT-MODEL A as shownbelow.

I/O Unit-MODEL A NC

X0.0 Y0.0

(off) (off)Y0.0=on

(LADDER DIAGRAM MONITOR)

WARNINGSpecial care must be exercised when a signal with the forced input/outputfunction. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, the operation ofthe machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function when persons arenear the machine.

- 212 -





B.2 SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCEDINPUT/OUTPUT

Use the procedures below to set the input/output modes.(1) Operation for enabling FORCING mode

Use the procedure below.

(a) Turn on the power.

(b) Press the emergency stop button.

(2) Operation for enabling OVERRIDE mode

Use the procedure below.

(a) Turn on the power.

(b) Press the emergency stop button.

(c) Set bit 0 of K906 (keep relay) to 1.

(d) Turn the power off and on again while holding down the emergency stop button.

WARNINGSpecial care must be exercised when modifying a signal with the forcedinput/output function. If the forced input/output function is used incorrectly, theoperation of the machine may be unpredictable. Never use this function whenpersons are near the machine.

CAUTION1 Upon completion of forced input/output operations, reset keep relay K906#0 to 0.2 Turning on the power with the emergency stop button released resets keep relay

K906#0 to 0. (The OVERRIDE mode is disabled.)

3 The setting of OVERRIDE is not maintained when the power is turned off. Whenthe power is turned on again, the setting of OVERRIDE is cleared for X and Yaddresses.

4 Do not force input/output operations for any signal other than those (except the Faddress) usable with the custom PMC function.Never force input/output operations especially for X8.4 (emergency stop) or Y6.1(Z-axis brake control).

- 213 -





B.3 SCREEN DISPLAY

On the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the value of a desired signal can forcibly be modified.

On this screen, the following two input modes are available: Forced input/output and override. To

move to the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, click soft key [FORCED I/O] on the SIGNAL STATUS

screen. The following operations can be performed on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen:

• Search for a signal: [SEARCH]

• Switch to the decimal display and input mode: [DEC]

• Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode: [HEX]

• Display the SIGNAL STATUS screen: [EXIT]

• Turn the signal on: [ON]

• Turn the signal off: [OFF]

• Set override: [OVRIDE SET] (*1)

• Clear override for a signal: [OVRIDE RESET] (*1)

• Clear override for all signals: [INIT] (*1)*1 This soft key is enabled in override mode.

Input mode

Signal status display area

Additional information line

Message display lineKey input line

In the input mode section at the right of the title, "OVERRIDE" is displayed as the mode of the forcedinput/output function only in the override mode.

In the signal status display area, the signal status of each address is displayed. For X and Y signals, the

status of each bit for which override is set is displayed as follows.

(1) For an X signal

(Input signal from the I/O device) → (Input signal to the ladder program)

In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the input

signals to the ladder program on the right is displayed.

- 214 -





(2) For a Y signal

(Output signal from the ladder program) → (Output signal to the I/O device)

In the hexadecimal or decimal display on the right of the screen, the numeric value of the output

signals from the ladder program on the left is displayed.

On the message display line at the bottom of the screen, an error message is displayed when

required.

B.4 OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN ANDMODIFYING THE VALUES OF SIGNALS

Soft keys on the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen

Force input/output

Override

Searches for an address.Turns the signal off.

Turns the signal on.

Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.

Switches to the decimal

input mode.

Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.

Searches for an address.

Switches to the SIGNAL STATUS screen.

Switches to thedecimal input mode.

Switches to the hexadecimal input mode.

Sets override.

Clears override for a signal.

Clears override for allsignals.

Turns the signal off.

Turns the signal on.

- 215 -





- 216 -

Operations using soft keys(1) [SEARCH] Search for an address

Searches for a byte or bit address.

(2) [DECIMAL] Switch to the decimal input mode

Switches the contents of the byte to the decimal display and input mode.This soft key is enabled only when the hexadecimal display and input mode is set.

(3) [HEX] Switch to the hexadecimal display and input mode

Switches the contents of the byte to the hexadecimal display and input mode.

This soft key is enabled only when the decimal display and input mode is set.

(4) [EXIT] Switch to the SIGNAL STATUS screen

Terminates the forced input/output function.

(5) [ON] Turn the signal on

Places the signal at the cursor in the on state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending

on the cursor position.

(6) [OFF] Turn the signal off

Places the signal at the cursor in the off state. Operation in bit or byte units is available depending

on the cursor position.(7) [OVRSET] Set override

Places the X or Y address at the cursor in the override state. Operation in bit or byte units is

available depending on the cursor position.

This soft key is enabled only in the override mode.

(8) [OVRRST] Clear override for a signal

Clears the override state of the X or Y address at the cursor. Operation in bit or byte units is

available depending on the cursor position.


(9) Clear override for all signals

Clears the override state of all X and Y addresses.





- 217 -


Screen operations using other keys(1) INPUT key

Use this key to modify the status of a signal or signals.

(a) Setting in bit units

• Enter 1, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the on state.• Enter 0, then press the INPUT key to place the signal in the off state.

• Just press the INPUT key to invert the on/off state of the signal.

(b) Setting in byte units

At the byte cursor, enter a binary number consisting of up to 8 digits, then press the INPUT key.

(If an entered number is shorter than 8 digits, the number is entered starting from bit 0.)

Example: When 100 is entered, the number is entered as follows:

Bit number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

When the cursor is on a HEX or DECIMAL field, hexadecimal or decimal input in byte units is

available.

(c) Continuous data inputContinuous data can be entered vertically. The cursor moves at the end of continuously

entered data.

• Use a semicolon (;, EOB) as the data delimiter.

Example: "1;0;1" + INPUT key

• Use ;= to enter the same value as for the previous data.

Example: "1;=;=;0;=" + INPUT key: 1,1,1,0,0

• Use ;; to skip an address.

Example: "1;;1" + INPUT key: Nothing is entered in the second item.

• Use "R;input-value;count" to enter the same input value as many times as the specified

number.

Example: "R;1;200" + INPUT key: A value of 1 is entered in the vertical 200 fields.(2) Cursor keys

Use the cursor keys to select a signal whose value is to be modified.

Pressing the cursor left key when the cursor is at bit 7 of an address changes the cursor to the byte

cursor.

Pressing the cursor right key when the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field of an address

changes the cursor to the byte cursor for selecting the entire 1 byte next to the address.

When the cursor is in the HEX or DECIMAL field or is the byte cursor, the values of the entire 1

byte of the address can be modified.

(3) Page keys

Use the page keys to move the display.

Return key operationOn the FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT screen, the return key is disabled.

To terminate the forced input/output mode and display the SIGNAL STATUS screen again, use soft key

[EXIT].




C. CUSTOM LADDERPROGRAM COMMENTSWITCHING PROCEDURE

C CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENTSWITCHING PROCEDURE

C.1 OVERVIEW

When custom ladder program comment display needs to be switched according to the language setting on

the CNC, set the system parameters according to the procedure below by using FANUC LADDER-III.

C.2 SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING

Use the procedure below to set a comment display language.

(1) Open the custom ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III.

(2) Open the system parameter screen.

- 218 -




- 219 -

C. CUSTOM LADDERPROGRAM COMMENTSWITCHING PROCEDURE

(3) Click [Language for Comment]. Next, on the [Language for Comment] dialog box, set comment

set numbers to be displayed on the PMC screen for the CNC display language.

Comment set number

First comment = 0

Second comment = 1

:

CNC display language

number

Delimit a CNC display language from a

comment set number with a comma.

Displays the first comment

when the CNC display

language is other than Englishand Japanese.

Displays the first comment


language is English.

Displays the second comment


language is Japanese.

Number of display language

settings (comments)

[CNC display language numbers]

0: English 9: Danish

1: Japanese 10: Portuguese

2: German 11: Polish

3: French 12: Hungarian

4: Chinese (traditional) 13: Swedish

5: Italian 14: Czech

6: Korean 15: Chinese (simplified)

7: Spanish 16: Russian

8: Dutch -1: Other




D. MULTI-LANGUAGEDISPLAY FUNCTION

- 220 -

D MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION

With this series, the PMC message multi-language display function is available. When compared withthe conventional multi-language display function using the message shift function, the PMC messagemulti-language display function has the features indicated below. For details, refer to "FANUCLADDER-III Operator's Manual (B-66234)".

• Alarm message and operator message data is stored in a memory card format different from theformat used for conventional ladder programs, and is loaded into the CNC independently of theseladder programs.

• Multi-language alarm message and operator message data can be defined.

• Multi-language settings can be made without dividing A addresses. This means that all Aaddresses can be used for each language to define many messages.

• When the CNC display language setting is changed, the language for alarm messages and operator

messages is switched without turning off the power of the CNC.

To use the PMC message multi-language display function, use the following procedure:

(1) Create a message file for multi-language display.(2) Add message data to the main body of the ladder program.(3) Convert the message data to a memory card format file.(4) Incorporate the created memory card format file into the CNC.

TIP

• Second PMC message files for the multi-language display function to be used

with the custom PMC are not installed on the machine at the time of shipmentfrom the factory.

• To stop the use of the multi-language display function after a second PMCmessage file is installed to use the multi-language display function, the secondPMC message file "M2PMCMSG" needs to be deleted. For the procedure ofdeletion, see (7) in Section 11.2, "OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN".





- 221 -

D.1 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR MULTI-LANGUAGEDISPLAY

Create message data by using a text editor on the personal computer.Here, set message data in a language other than English.The data format is indicated below.

1. File formatFile type = Text file (*.TXT)Character code = ANSI/Unicode(UTF-16)

(Identification code)

(Title information)

(Comment between lines)

(Message data 1)

(Message data 2)

(Comment between lines)

(Message data 3)

(Message data 4)

:

(Identification code)

2. Identification codeAn identification code is used to mark the start and end of message data.

Start: %@4-DEnd: %

3. Title informationEnclose title information in double quotation marks.Up to 256 half-size characters can be entered. (Title information can be omitted.)

4. Comment between linesEnclose a comment between lines in double quotation marks.

No comment between lines is output to a memory card format file.





5. Message data

Language ID Address Message character string

Example) $1 %A100.0 1900 COOLANT ALARM

(a) Language IDSpecify a language ID for a message character string with "Dollar($)"+"Language ID".

Language ID

1: Japanese 7: Spanish

2: German 10: Portuguese

3: French 15: Chinese (Simplified)

4: Chinese (Traditional) 16: Russian

5: Italian

(b) Address

Be sure to prefix % to an address.The usable addresses are A100.0 to A149.7.

(c) Message character stringSpecify an alarm message number at the beginning then specify an alarm message to bedisplayed.

An example of message data is given below. ([@0A@] of title information represents a line feedcode.)

%@4-D

" FANUC ROBODRILL D14/21iA SERIES MESSAGE DATA@0A@ EDITION :

0001@0A@ DATE : 2012/03/29 "

$2 %A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note: Added alarm)

$2 %A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note: Added operator message)

:

:

$10 %A100.0 1900 COLLANT ALARM (Note: Added alarm)

$10 %A100.1 2060 COOLANT LEVEL LOW (Note: Added operator message)

%

TIP

• In this message data file, set messages in a language other than English.

• Set English message data as message data for the main body of the ladder

program.

- 222 -





D.2 CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN BODY OFTHE LADDER PROGRAM

Select "Message" on the FANUC LADDER-III program list screen to open the message editing screen.

- 223 -





Add and edit English messages.Even when no English message is needed, be sure to set alarm numbers.

The table below indicates the usable alarm numbers, operator messagenumbers, and A addresses.

Alarm 1900 to 1999

Operator message 2060 to 2099

A address A100.0 to A149.7

- 224 -





D.3 CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA

D.3.1 Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display

Convert a text file (mnemonic file) containing message data for multi-language display to a memory cardformat file.

Open the command prompt screen.

Execute the following at the command prompt (as an example where a file created in Section D.1 isnamed PMC2_MSG.TXT):

>C:

>CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3>FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM

Explanation)Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed.(Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.)Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the mnemonic format message file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) created inSection D.1 to a second PMC message file (PMC2_MSG.MEM) in the memory card format formulti-language display that can be loaded with the ROBODRILL.

A message file in the memory card format can be created by creating and executing the following BATfile:

File name (example): MAKE_MEM.BAT

Contents of a BAT file (example):

C:

CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3

FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT /p=2 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.MEM

- 225 -





NOTE1 FPMCMSG.exe is stored in the FANUC LADDER-III installation folder

("C\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3" usually).2 Usually, the result of command execution is output to the output screen. Use a

"greater than" sign (>) for redirection to a file or printer from the output screen.3 Line comments other than title information are not output to a memory card

format file.

FPMCMSG is detailed below.

FPMCMSG [drive:][path]message-file1 [ [drive:][path]message-file2 ] [ …]

[/m=[drive:][path]

lad-mcard-file ] [/l=[drive:][path]

lad-file ]

/o=[drive:][path]

mcard-file

.

Parameters

[drive:][path]

message-file1,[drive:][path]

message-file2, …Specifies the location and name of a source file of multi-language PMC messages.

Multiple files can be specified using a plus sign (+).

If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed

/m=[drive:][path]lad-mcard-file

A memory card file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally.For lad-mcard-file, specify the name of a memory card file of a PMC sequence program related to the source file of multi-language PMC messages.If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.

This parameter can be omitted.

/l=[drive:][path]lad-file

A LAD file can be specified to check in detail why messages are not displayed normally.For lad-file, specify the name of a LAD file related to the source file of multi-language PMC messages.If the specified LAD file contains no memory card file, the check with this parameter is not performed.If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.

This parameter can be omitted.

Do not execute this tool when the LAD file specified for /L is open on FANUC LADDER-III.

/o=[drive:][path]mcard-file

Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory card file) to be created.

If [drive:][path] is omitted, the current folder is assumed.

D.3.2 Converting the Ladder Program

Compile the ladder program with FANUC LADDER-III to create a memory card format file. For details,see Section A.3.

- 226 -





D.4 INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILES INTOTHE CNC

Install two memory card format files created in Section D.3 on the CNC.

For installation of the files on the CNC, two methods are available:

• One method writes the files directly to the flash ROM from the boot menu.

• The other method reads the files from the I/O screen of the PMC to the memory then writes the filesto the flash ROM.

For details, see Chapter 11, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA".

D.5 CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE TO AMNEMONIC FORMAT FILE

When editing message data again by using a memory card format message file for multi-language display,convert data output from the machine, to a mnemonic format file, according to the following procedure:

(1) Back up a ROBODRILL message file for multi-language display from the machine. (See Chapter11.)

(2) Copy the backed-up message file for multi-language display to the hard disk of the personalcomputer.(Example: Copy the message file to C:\PMC folder.)

(3) Open the command prompt screen.

- 227 -




- 228 -


(4) Execute the following at the command prompt:

>C:

>CD C:\Program Files\FANUC PMC Programmer\FANUC LADDER-3

>FPMCMSG C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.000 /o=C:\PMC\PMC2_MSG.TXT

Explanation)Lines 1 and 2 make a movement to the drive directory where FANUC LADDER-III is installed.(Modify the move destination to the directory where the software is actually installed.)Line 3 executes FPMCMSG to convert the memory card format message file (PMC2_MSG.000) to amnemonic format file (PMC2_MSG.TXT). (The file name is just an example. Change it to the nameof an actually backed-up message file for multi-language display.)For repeated conversion, create a BAT file with the contents above.

FPMCMSG is detailed below.

FPMCMSG

[drive:][path]mcard-file

[/unicode]

/o=[drive:] [path]message-text-file

Parameters

[drive:][path]mcard-file

Specifies the location and name of a multi-language PMC message file (memory

card file).


/unicode

Outputs the message character strings to a source file in Unicode.

If this parameter is omitted, the message character strings are output in ANSI.

/o=[drive:][path]message-text-file

Specifies the location and name of a source file.


(5) With a text editor, open and edit the file (PMC2_MSG.TXT) converted to the mnemonic format.



B-85314EN-1/01 INDEX

i-1

INDEX

<A>

ADDITIONAL AXIS CLAMP CONTROL ................120

Additional I/O Unit (I/O Module + Terminal Module) ..37

Additional I/O Unit for Sub-Operator's Panel..... ...........22

ADDRESSES AVAILABLE TO CUSTOM PMC ........47

AI TOOL MONITOR ...................... ....................... .....127

ALARM AND ERROR MESSAGES LIST.................144

ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGE DISPLAY...132

ALARM OUTPUT 2....................................................117

AUTOMATIC SIDE DOOR CONTROL....................126

<B>

BASIC SIGNALS..................... ....................... ............105

BLOCK SKIP...............................................................136

<C>

COMPLETION OF MACHINING..............................125

CONFIRMATION ...................... ....................... ............71

CONTROL SIGNAL FOR EACH SERVO AXIS.......129

CONVERSION TO A SOURCE FILE........................182

CONVERTING A MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE

TO A MNEMONIC FORMAT FILE.......................227

CONVERTING MESSAGE DATA ....................... .....225

Converting Message Data for Multi-Language Display225

Converting the Ladder Program...................................226

COOLANT, MACHINE INTERIOR CLEANING

COOLANT, CENTER THROUGH COOLANT,

AND AIR BLOW.....................................................125

Count of Periodical Maintenance Customize Item.......136

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY ....................... .....221

CREATING MESSAGE DATA FOR THE MAIN

BODY OF THE LADDER PROGRAM ..................223

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM COMMENT

SWITCHING PROCEDURE...................... .............218

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAM CREATION...........193

CUSTOM MACROS ....................... ....................... .....130

CUSTOM PMC EDITING WITH FANUC

LADDER-III ...................... ........................ ..............181

<D>

DISPLAYING THE LADDER PROGRAM STATUS..71

<E>

EDITING ...................... ....................... ...................... ....50

EDITING ALARM AND OPERATOR MESSAGES65,205

EDITING LADDER PROGRAMS...........................51,53

EDITING SYMBOLS AND COMMENTS...................68

ENDING AN EDITING SESSION................................70

EXPLANATION OF TERMS ........................ .................3

EXTERNAL M CODE BCD OUTPUT FUNCTION..113

EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH

FUNCTION..............................................................110

EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH

FUNCTION..............................................................108

<F>

FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION.................... 209

FRONT AUTOMATIC DOOR CONTROL................106

FRONT DOOR LOCK CONTROL.............................126

<I>

I/O Communication Error Messages............................172

I/O Link Connection Unit ..................... ......................... 22

I/O Module Editing ...................... ....................... .........189

I/O Unit Model-A...........................................................10

INCORPORATING MEMORY CARD FORMAT

FILES INTO THE CNC...........................................227

INPUT/OUTPUT OF EDIT DATA...............................78

INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS.............................6INPUTTING ALPHABETIC CHARACTERS..............48

INTERFACE SIGNALS BETWEEN SYSTEM AND

CUSTOM LADDER PROGRAMS ...................... .....84

INTERRUPT TYPE CUSTOM MACRO FUNCTION

(OPTION) ...................... ....................... ................... 117

<L>

Ladder Editing ........................ ........................ .............186

LADDER PROGRAM COMPILATION AND

LOADING FILE CREATION ........................ .........190

LADDER PROGRAM EDITING................................185

Ladder Program Message Editing................................205

<M>

M CODE OUTPUT FUNCTION (M80 TO M89).......116

M FUNCTION CODE SIGNALS ...................... .........131

MACHINE INTERIOR LAMP....................................132

MACHINE STATUS...................................................105

MACHINE STATUS OUTPUT ........................ ..........124

Message Editing...........................................................188

Messages That May Be Displayed on the PMC Alarm

Screen.......................................................................144

MULTI-LANGUAGE DISPLAY FUNCTION...........220

<N>

NOTES......................... ....................... ...................... .......4

<O>

OPERATING THE FORCED INPUT/OUTPUT

SCREEN AND MODIFYING THE VALUES OF

SIGNALS.................................................................215

OPERATION CONTROL ...................... ..................... 131

Operation Errors...........................................................157

OPERATION MODE SWITCHING..................... ......122

OPERATION ON THE BOOT SCREEN......................81

OPERATION ON THE INPUT/OUTPUT SCREEN....78

OPERATOR'S PANEL................................................121

Optional I/O Module Connection...................................46

OPTIONAL INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS......10

OUTLINE ....................... ...................... ....................... ....1

OVERRIDE CONTROL..............................................133



INDEX B-85314EN-1/01

i-2

OVERVIEW ..................... ....................... .............209,218

<P>

Parameter Setting When Optional I/O Modules Are

Used............................................................................46

PMC System Alarm Messages........ ........................ .....152

POSITION SWITCH ....................... ....................... .....128

POWER-OFF........................ ....................... ................132

PREFACE..................... ....................... ....................... . p-1

PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT...............................123

<R>

RESET AND REWIND FUNCTION....................... ...117

ROBOT INTERFACE ..................... ....................... .....134

<S>

SCREEN DISPLAY..............................................128,214

SETTING PARAMETERS..........................................143SETTING PMC PARAMETERS...................................74

SETTING/OPERATION FOR ENABLING FORCED

INPUT/OUTPUT ..................... ....................... .........213

SIGNAL DIAGNOSIS...................................................73

SPECIFICATIONS ..................... ....................... ..............5

SPINDLE ....................... ....................... ....................... 127

STANDARD INPUT/OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS ......6

STARTING AN EDITING SESSION ........................ ...50

Switching to the Edit Screen..... ......................... ............51

Symbol and Comment Editing ........................ .............187

System Parameter Editing ........................ ....................189

SYSTEM PARAMETER SETTING.......................... ..218

<T>

Terminal Module B........................................................29

Title Editing ..................... ........................ ....................185

TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ...................... ..............118

<U>

USING TYPICAL FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTIONS 137



B-85314EN-1/01 REVISION RECORD

r-1

REVISION RECORD

Edition Date Contents

01 Jun., 2012



Documents

B-85314EN-1_01 Fanuc Robodrill Custom PMC Functions